RFID SYSTEMS SIMATIC Sensors RFID systems MOBY D MOBY D System Manual * 01/2010 SIMATIC Sensors Answers for industry. SIMATIC Sensors RFID systems MOBY D System Manual 01/2010 J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Introduction 1 Safety information/instructions 2 System overview 3 Planning the MOBY D system 4 Mobile data storage units 5 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7 Antennas 8 System integration 9 Accessories 10 Alarm, error and system messages 11 Troubleshooting/FAQ 12 Certificates and approvals A Service & Support B Previous versions C List of abbreviations D Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY J31069-D0147-A6-7618 01/2010 Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2010 . Technical data subject to change Table of contents 1 2 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. 13 1.1 Preface.........................................................................................................................................13 1.2 Navigating in the system manual .................................................................................................15 1.3 Overview ......................................................................................................................................16 1.4 Main applications .........................................................................................................................17 Safety information/instructions................................................................................................................. 19 2.1 3 System overview...................................................................................................................................... 21 3.1 4 General safety instructions ..........................................................................................................19 System overview for MOBY D .....................................................................................................21 Planning the MOBY D system ................................................................................................................. 25 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 Fundamentals of application planning .........................................................................................25 Transmission window and read/write distance ............................................................................25 Width of the transmission window................................................................................................27 Transmission window with auxiliary fields ...................................................................................27 Permissible directions of motion of the MDS ...............................................................................29 Operation in static and dynamic mode ........................................................................................30 Communication between ASM, write/read device and MDS .......................................................31 Tolerance of tracking of pallet......................................................................................................32 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 Field data .....................................................................................................................................33 Field data for MDS and SLG........................................................................................................33 Minimum spacing .........................................................................................................................37 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.4.1 4.3.4.2 4.3.5 4.3.6 4.3.7 Installation guidelines...................................................................................................................38 Overview ......................................................................................................................................38 Permissible mounting material.....................................................................................................38 Metal-free area.............................................................................................................................40 Influences affecting the transmission window..............................................................................43 MDS in metal-free environment ...................................................................................................49 MDS in the vicinity of metal..........................................................................................................50 Reduction of interference due to metal........................................................................................51 Mounting of multiple antennas on or between metal frames .......................................................53 Installation and interconnection of 2, 3 or 4 MOBY D antennas to one SLG D10/D10S write/read device..........................................................................................................................54 4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS..................................................................................................61 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.5.4 4.5.5 4.5.6 4.5.7 4.5.8 EMC Guidelines ...........................................................................................................................68 Overview ......................................................................................................................................68 What does EMC mean?...............................................................................................................69 Basic rules....................................................................................................................................70 Propagation of electromagnetic interference ...............................................................................71 Cabinet configuration ...................................................................................................................75 Prevention of interference sources ..............................................................................................78 Equipotential bonding ..................................................................................................................79 Ground-fault monitoring with MOBY ............................................................................................80 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 5 Table of contents 5 6 4.5.9 Cable shielding............................................................................................................................ 81 4.6 MOBY shield concept.................................................................................................................. 83 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 Cable and connector assignment ............................................................................................... 85 Cable configuration ..................................................................................................................... 85 Connector pin assignment for SLG D1x (RS232)....................................................................... 86 Connector pin assignment for D1xS (RS422)............................................................................. 88 Connecting cable ........................................................................................................................ 90 Mobile data storage units......................................................................................................................... 95 5.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 95 5.2 Memory configuration of the ISO tags ........................................................................................ 98 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 MDS D100................................................................................................................................... 99 Characteristics ............................................................................................................................ 99 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................. 99 Metal-free area............................................................................................................................ 99 Mounting options....................................................................................................................... 101 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 104 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 105 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 MDS D124................................................................................................................................. 106 Characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 106 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 106 Mounting on metal..................................................................................................................... 106 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 108 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 109 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6 5.5.7 MDS D139................................................................................................................................. 110 Characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 110 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 110 Mounting on metal..................................................................................................................... 111 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 113 Use of the MDS D139 in potentially explosive environments ................................................... 114 Dimensional drawing................................................................................................................. 116 Cleaning the mobile data memory ............................................................................................ 116 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 MDS D160................................................................................................................................. 117 Characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 117 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 117 Mounting on metal..................................................................................................................... 118 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 119 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 120 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 MDS D165................................................................................................................................. 121 Features .................................................................................................................................... 121 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 121 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 122 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 123 5.8 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.8.4 5.8.5 MDS D200................................................................................................................................. 124 Features .................................................................................................................................... 124 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 124 Mounting on metal..................................................................................................................... 125 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 127 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 128 5.9 MDS D261................................................................................................................................. 129 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Table of contents 6 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 5.9.4 Features .....................................................................................................................................129 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................129 Technical data............................................................................................................................130 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................131 5.10 5.10.1 5.10.2 5.10.3 5.10.4 5.10.5 MDS D324..................................................................................................................................132 Characteristics ...........................................................................................................................132 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................132 Metal-free area...........................................................................................................................133 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................134 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................135 5.11 5.11.1 5.11.2 5.11.3 5.11.4 5.11.5 MDS D424..................................................................................................................................136 Characteristics ...........................................................................................................................136 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................136 Mounting on metal .....................................................................................................................136 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................138 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................139 5.12 5.12.1 5.12.2 5.12.3 5.12.4 5.12.5 MDS D428..................................................................................................................................140 Characteristics ...........................................................................................................................140 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................140 Application example of MDS D428 ............................................................................................141 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................142 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................143 5.13 5.13.1 5.13.2 5.13.3 5.13.4 5.13.5 MDS D460..................................................................................................................................144 Characteristics ...........................................................................................................................144 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................144 Mounting on metal .....................................................................................................................145 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................146 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................147 Write/read devices with RS232 interface ............................................................................................... 149 6.1 Overview of SLG with RS 232 serial interface...........................................................................149 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 SLG D10 basic unit ....................................................................................................................153 Features .....................................................................................................................................153 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................153 Technical data............................................................................................................................154 FCC information .........................................................................................................................155 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................156 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 SLG D11 basic unit ....................................................................................................................157 Features .....................................................................................................................................157 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................157 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................158 FCC information .........................................................................................................................159 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................160 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.7 6.4.8 SLG D12 ....................................................................................................................................161 Features .....................................................................................................................................161 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................161 Technical data............................................................................................................................162 FCC information .........................................................................................................................163 Transmission window.................................................................................................................164 Secondary fields ........................................................................................................................165 Influence of metal.......................................................................................................................166 Metal-free area...........................................................................................................................167 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 7 Table of contents 6.4.9 6.4.10 7 8 8 Minimum distances between several SLGs .............................................................................. 168 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 169 Write/read devices with RS422 interface ............................................................................................... 171 7.1 Overview SLG with RS 422 for SIMATIC S7 and PROFIBUS DP-V1 ...................................... 171 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 SLG D10S basic unit................................................................................................................. 174 Features .................................................................................................................................... 174 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 175 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 176 FCC information ........................................................................................................................ 177 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 178 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 SLG D11S basic unit................................................................................................................. 179 Features .................................................................................................................................... 179 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 180 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 181 FCC information ........................................................................................................................ 182 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 183 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 7.4.5 7.4.6 7.4.7 7.4.8 7.4.9 7.4.10 SLG D12S ................................................................................................................................. 184 Features .................................................................................................................................... 184 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 185 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 186 FCC information ........................................................................................................................ 187 Transmission window................................................................................................................ 188 Secondary fields........................................................................................................................ 189 Influence of metal...................................................................................................................... 190 Metal-free area.......................................................................................................................... 191 Minimum distances between several SLGs .............................................................................. 192 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 193 7.5 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.5.4 7.5.5 7.5.6 7.5.7 7.5.8 7.5.9 7.5.10 SLG D12S (plug-in version) ...................................................................................................... 194 Features .................................................................................................................................... 194 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 195 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 196 Field data................................................................................................................................... 197 Transmission window................................................................................................................ 198 Secondary fields........................................................................................................................ 199 Influence of metal...................................................................................................................... 200 Metal-free area.......................................................................................................................... 201 Minimum distances between several SLGs .............................................................................. 202 Dimensional diagram ................................................................................................................ 203 Antennas ............................................................................................................................................... 205 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5 8.1.6 8.1.7 ANT D2...................................................................................................................................... 205 Features .................................................................................................................................... 205 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 205 Technical specifications for ANT D2 ......................................................................................... 206 Transmission window................................................................................................................ 207 Metal-free area.......................................................................................................................... 208 Minimum distance between several ANT D2 antennas ............................................................ 209 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 209 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 ANT D5...................................................................................................................................... 210 Features .................................................................................................................................... 210 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 210 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 211 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Table of contents 9 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.2.7 Transmission window.................................................................................................................212 Metal-free area...........................................................................................................................213 Minimum distance between antennas .......................................................................................214 Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................215 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.3.7 ANT D6 ......................................................................................................................................218 Features .....................................................................................................................................218 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................218 Technical data............................................................................................................................219 Transmission window.................................................................................................................220 Metal-free area...........................................................................................................................221 Minimum distance between antennas .......................................................................................221 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................222 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 8.4.6 8.4.7 ANT D10 ....................................................................................................................................223 Features .....................................................................................................................................223 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................223 Technical data............................................................................................................................224 Transmission window.................................................................................................................225 Metal-free area...........................................................................................................................226 Minimum distance between antennas .......................................................................................227 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................228 System integration ................................................................................................................................. 229 9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3 9.1.4 9.1.4.1 9.1.4.2 9.1.4.3 9.1.4.4 9.1.5 9.1.5.1 9.1.5.2 9.1.6 9.1.6.1 9.1.6.2 9.1.7 9.1.8 9.1.9 ASM 452 ....................................................................................................................................231 Application area .........................................................................................................................231 Features .....................................................................................................................................231 Configuration..............................................................................................................................232 PROFIBUS DP communication .................................................................................................233 PROFIBUS DP configuring ........................................................................................................233 Operating mode of the ASM 452 ...............................................................................................233 PROFIBUS DP diagnostics........................................................................................................233 PROFIBUS DP address and terminating resistor ......................................................................234 Device connections....................................................................................................................235 Reader connection system ........................................................................................................235 Pin assignments.........................................................................................................................237 Cable..........................................................................................................................................238 PROFIBUS DP cable with 24 V supply......................................................................................238 Example of stripped lengths.......................................................................................................238 Technical data............................................................................................................................239 Dimension diagram ....................................................................................................................240 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................241 9.2 ASM 456 ....................................................................................................................................242 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 9.3.5.1 9.3.5.2 9.3.6 9.3.7 9.3.8 ASM 473 ....................................................................................................................................243 Application area .........................................................................................................................243 Features .....................................................................................................................................243 Basic module - Requirements for operation of ASM 473 ..........................................................244 Configuration..............................................................................................................................245 Device connections....................................................................................................................247 Reader connection system ........................................................................................................247 Pin assignments.........................................................................................................................248 Technical data............................................................................................................................250 Dimension diagram ....................................................................................................................251 Ordering data .............................................................................................................................252 9.4 ASM 475 ....................................................................................................................................253 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 9 Table of contents 10 11 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.4.5 9.4.5.1 9.4.6 9.4.6.1 9.4.6.2 9.4.6.3 9.4.7 9.4.7.1 9.4.8 9.4.9 Application area ........................................................................................................................ 253 Features .................................................................................................................................... 254 Configuration............................................................................................................................. 254 Configuration............................................................................................................................. 256 PROFIBUS DP communication ................................................................................................ 257 Diagnosis using LEDs ............................................................................................................... 257 Device connections ................................................................................................................... 258 Wiring to the SLG...................................................................................................................... 258 Shield connection...................................................................................................................... 259 Lightning protection................................................................................................................... 260 Cable ......................................................................................................................................... 260 Cable assembly by the customer.............................................................................................. 260 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 261 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 262 9.5 RF170C ..................................................................................................................................... 263 9.6 RF180C ..................................................................................................................................... 264 9.7 RF182C ..................................................................................................................................... 265 Accessories ........................................................................................................................................... 267 10.1 10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 10.1.4 10.1.5 10.1.6 10.1.7 10.1.8 10.1.9 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems ......................................................... 267 Features .................................................................................................................................... 267 Scope of supply......................................................................................................................... 268 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................ 268 Safety Information ..................................................................................................................... 269 Connecting ................................................................................................................................ 271 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 271 Pin assignment of DC outputs and mains connection .............................................................. 273 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 274 Certificates and approvals......................................................................................................... 275 10.2 Mobile handheld terminals ........................................................................................................ 276 10.3 MOBY antenna distributor......................................................................................................... 277 Alarm, error and system messages ....................................................................................................... 279 11.1 Error messages and causes for MOBY D in combination with the MDWAPI library ................ 280 11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing) ............................................................................................................................... 282 General errors ........................................................................................................................... 282 Error messages......................................................................................................................... 283 11.2.1 11.2.2 12 Troubleshooting/FAQ............................................................................................................................. 293 A Certificates and approvals ..................................................................................................................... 295 B Service & Support.................................................................................................................................. 299 C Previous versions .................................................................................................................................. 301 10 C.1 C.1.1 C.1.2 C.1.3 Previous MDS version with different MLFB .............................................................................. 301 Compatibility list ........................................................................................................................ 301 MDS D124 (MLFB 6GT2600-0AC00) ....................................................................................... 302 MDS D139 (MLFB 6GT2600-0AA00) ....................................................................................... 306 C.2 C.2.1 C.2.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5................................................................................................ 311 Compatibility list ........................................................................................................................ 311 SLG D10 ANT D5 (MLFB 6GT2601-0AA00) ............................................................................ 311 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Table of contents C.2.3 C.2.4 C.2.5 D SLG D11 ANT D5 (MLFB 6GT2601-0AC00) .............................................................................319 SLG D10S ANT D5 (6GT2602-0AA00) .....................................................................................326 SLG D11S ANT D5 (6GT2602-0AC00) .....................................................................................333 List of abbreviations............................................................................................................................... 341 Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 343 Index...................................................................................................................................................... 347 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 11 Table of contents 12 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Introduction 1.1 1 Preface Objective of this documentation This system manual contains all the information needed to plan and configure the system. It is intended both for programming and testing/debugging personnel who commission the system themselves and connect it with other units (automation systems, further programming devices), as well as for service and maintenance personnel who install expansions or carry out fault/error analyses. Scope of this document This documentation is valid for all supplied versions of the MOBY D system and describes the state of delivery as of 01/2010. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 13 Introduction 1.1 Preface History Previous editions of these operating instructions: Output 01/2010 MDS D165, MDS D200, MDS D261, MDS D324, MDS D424, MDS D428, MDS D460 SIMATIC RF180C, RF182C interface modules SLG D12S (plug-in version) ANT D2 11/2006 Edition of a system manual with adaptation of the content structures Supplements: SIMATIC RF170C interface module Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems 09/2005 Edition of a system manual with adaptation of the content structures Supplements: write/read device SLG D10/D10S basic unit ANT D6m, ANT D10 antennas ASM 456 interface module MOBY antenna distributor 09/2003 Supplements: MDS D100, MDS D124 mobile data storage unit SLG D11S ANT D5; SLG D12S write/read devices 12/2002 Supplements: Write/read device SLG D10S ANT D5 ASM 452; ASM 473; ASM 475 interface modules 10/2002 First edition of the configuration manual Conformity Certificates The EC declaration of conformity and the corresponding documentation are made available to the appropriate authorities in accordance with EC directives. Your sales representative can provide these on request. Observance of installation guidelines Adhere to the installation guidelines and safety instructions given in this documentation during commissioning and operation. 14 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Introduction 1.2 Navigating in the system manual 1.2 Navigating in the system manual Structure of contents Contents Table of contents Organization of the documentation, including the index of pages and chapters Introduction Purpose, layout and description of the important topics. Safety instructions All generally valid safety-related aspects that according to legal regulations from a product/system viewpoint at installation, at startup, during operation have to be observed. System overview Overview of all RF identification systems, system overview of MOBY D Planning the MOBY D system Information regarding: Possible applications of MOBY D Support in application planning Selection aids for finding the suitable MOBY D components. Mobile data storage units Description of the mobile data storage units (MDS) used for MOBY D Write/read devices with RS232 interface Description of the write/read devices (SLG) with RS232 interface used for MOBY D Write/read devices with RS422 interface Description of the write/read devices (SLG) with RS422 interface used for MOBY D Antennas Description of the external MOBY D antennas System integration Description of the interface modules (ASM) used for MOBY D Accessories Products supplied separately for MOBY D Alarm, error and system messages Overview of error messages Troubleshooting/FAQ Troubleshooting and error messages Appendix Previous versions List of components with a successor version or which have been discontinued. List of Abbreviations List of all abbreviations used in the document Glossary List of all terms used in the document Index Index Certificates and approvals Service and support MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 15 Introduction 1.3 Overview 1.3 Overview MOBY D is an RF identification system based on the ISO/IEC 15693 standard in the 13.56 MHz range. ISO/IEC 15693 creates a common basis for tags and Smartlabels from different manufacturers for the first time. Application areas typically encompass the following: Replacement for electronic barcode Supplement to barcode or delivery note in harsh environments Warehouse and distribution logistics Product identification MOBY D can be directly connected to a PC with Windows 9x Professional, 2000 Professional und NT Professional over a serial (RS 232) interface and is supported by a powerful C library. It is integrated into SIMATIC S7 and PROFIBUS DP-V1 using the well-proven MOBY interface modules ASM 452 ASM 456 ASM 473 ASM 475 SIMATIC RF170C SIMATIC RF180C SIMATIC RF182C An easy-to-operate interface is available to the S7 user. With the MOBY D write/read device, the standardized, low-cost write/read transponders (Smartlabels based on ISO/IEC 15693) are processed at distances of up to 650 mm (depending on the size of transponder and antenna). 16 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Introduction 1.4 Main applications 1.4 Main applications The design of the transponder permits a variety of flexible designs, ensuring optimum dimensioning for the widest variety of applications. Low-cost Smartlabels for large volume applications: Container and box identification in open systems Distribution logistics and goods identification Parcel and postal services, couriers and logistics companies Baggage check-in and baggage tracking Up to 100 Smartlabels can be simultaneously detected (bulk detection) and the data can be selectively processed (multitag mode). Rugged data storage units in closed processes: Container and box identification in logistics and distribution Production logistics and assembly lines with extreme temperature requirements (e.g. paintshops, temperature range up to +220 C) Parts identification (e.g. data storage unit is attached directly to product/pallet). MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 17 Introduction 1.4 Main applications 18 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Safety information/instructions 2.1 2 General safety instructions SIMATIC RFID products comply with the salient safety specifications to IEC, VDE, EN, UL and CSA. If you have questions about the validity of the installation in the planned environment, please contact your service representative. CAUTION Alterations to the devices are not permitted. Failure to observe this requirement shall constitute a revocation of the radio equipment approval, CE approval and manufacturer's warranty. Repairs Repairs may only be carried out by authorized qualified personnel. WARNING Unauthorized opening of and improper repairs to the device may result in substantial damage to equipment or risk of personal injury to the user. System expansion Only install system expansion devices designed for this device. If you install other upgrades, you may damage the system or violate the safety requirements and regulations for radio frequency interference suppression. Contact your technical support team or your sales outlet to find out which system upgrades are suitable for installation. CAUTION If you cause system defects by installing or exchanging system expansion devices, the warranty becomes void. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 19 Safety information/instructions 2.1 General safety instructions 20 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System overview 3.1 3 System overview for MOBY D MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 21 &RPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHV System overview 3.1 System overview for MOBY D $60IRU 352),%86 '39 $60bIRU 352),%86 '3'39 $60b IRU (7; $60b 5)& IRU IRU 6,0$7,&6 (7SUR 5)& 5)& IRU352),1(7,2 3&LQWHUIDFH 56 0':$3, :ULWHUHDGGHYLFHV 6/*'6 $QWHQQDV 6\VWHPLQWHUQDO56LQWHUIDFH $17' 6/*'6 $17' 6\VWHPLQWHUQDO56LQWHUIDFH 6/*'6 $17' 6/*' $17' $17' 6/*' $17' $17' 6/*' $17' 0RELOHGDWDVWRUDJHXQLWV ,QGXFWLYHSRZHUGDWDWUDQVPLVVLRQ0+] 0'6' 0'6' Figure 3-1 22 0'6' 0'6' 0'6' 0'6' 0'6' 0'6' 0'6' 0'6' 0'6' Overview of MOBY D components MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System overview 3.1 System overview for MOBY D SLG D10/D10S with Tags SLG D11/D11S with SLG D12/D12S ANT D5 ANT D6 ANT D10 ANT D2 ANT D5 - MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D324 MDS D424 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D165 MDS D200 MDS D261 Combination possible Combination possible, but not recommended MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 23 System overview 3.1 System overview for MOBY D 24 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.1 4 Fundamentals of application planning Assess your application according to the following criteria, in order to choose the right MOBY D components: Transmission distance (read/write distance) Data volume to be transferred Metal-free areas for MDS and SLG (antenna) Static or dynamic data transfer Speed in case of dynamic transfer Tracking tolerances Ambient conditions such as relative humidity, temperature, chemical impacts, etc. Maximum writes per MDS System connection 4.1.1 Transmission window and read/write distance The write/read device (SLG) generates an inductive alternating field. The field is at its strongest near the antenna and declines rapidly as the distance from the antenna increases. The distribution of the field depends on the structure and geometry of the antennas in the write/read device and MDS. A prerequisite for the function of the MDS is a minimum field strength at the MDS that is achieved at a distance Sg from the write/read device. The figures below show as an example the transmission window between the MDS and ANT D5 antenna (in this case always parallel alignment of MDS to antenna/SLG). MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 25 Planning the MOBY D system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning / 6D 6J 6LGHYLHZ 7UDQVPLVVLRQ ZLQGRZ 0'6 $17' 0HWDOSODWH VSDFHUNLW*7$% 3ODQYLHZ 63 0'6 / Sa: Operating distance between MDS and SLG Sg Limit distance (maximum clear distance between upper surface of antenna and MDS, at which the transmission can still function under normal conditions) L Length of the transmission window (300 mm) SP Crossover point of the axes of symmetry of the MDS Figure 4-1 Transmission window based on the example of ANT D5 The active field to the MDS comprises a circle (ANT D5) or a square (ANT D6, D10; SLG D12/D12S). The MDS can be processed as soon as the crossover point (CP) of the MDS enters the circle or square of the transmission window. The direction of movement and rotation of the MDS has no effect. From the diagrams above, it can also be seen that operation is possible within the area between Sa and Sg. The active operating area reduces as the distance increases, and shrinks to a single point at distance Sg. Only static mode should thus be used in the area between Sa and Sg. For more detailed information on the transmission windows of the individual antennas, refer to the respective antenna or SLG chapters. 26 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.2 Width of the transmission window Determining the width of the transmission window The following approximation formula can be used for practical applications: W: Width of transmission window (median deviation) L: Length of the transmission window Tracking tolerance The width of the transmission window (W) is particularly important for the mechanical tracking tolerance. The formula for the dwell time is valid without restriction when W is observed. 4.1.3 Transmission window with auxiliary fields In general, auxiliary fields always exist. They can be found outside the antenna conductor loop and must be used for configuring only in exceptional cases since the write/read distances are limited. In the case of parallel movement of the MDS with a short operating distance through the antenna field, a transmission-free space is traversed when moving from the auxiliary field to the main field and also when exiting the main field (multiple presence change possible). Precise information on the field geometries of the auxiliary fields cannot be given since the values depend heavily on the operating distance and the application area. SLG Main field Secondary fields Figure 4-2 Transmission window with auxiliary fields for SLG MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 27 Planning the MOBY D system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning Antenna Main field Secondary fields Figure 4-3 28 Transmission window with auxiliary fields for antennas MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.4 Permissible directions of motion of the MDS Coverage area of antenna and direction of motion of MDS The MDS and antenna have no polarization axis, i.e. the MDS can come in from any direction, be placed at any position, and cross the transmission window. The data of the transmission window do not differ. The figure below shows the coverage area of the antenna for various directions of MDS motion: / RU : RU : / : Transmission window Direction of motion of the MDS Coverage area L x W Figure 4-4 Coverage areas of antenna/detection area of SLG for different directions of MDS motion MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 29 Planning the MOBY D system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.5 Operation in static and dynamic mode Operation in static mode If working in static mode, the MDS can be operated up to the limit distance (Sg). The MDS must then be positioned exactly over the SLG or the antenna: 0'6 6J 7UDQVPLVVLRQ ZLQGRZ $17' 0HWDOSODWH VSDFHUNLW Figure 4-5 ANT D5: Operation in static mode Operation in dynamic mode 7UDQVPLVVLRQ ZLQGRZ $17' 0'6 3ODQYLHZ / 0'6 Figure 4-6 30 ANT D5: Operation in dynamic mode MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.6 Communication between ASM, write/read device and MDS Communication with the SLG is asynchronous with a transmission rate of 19.2 Kbaud with SLG D11S/SLG D12S 38.4 Kbaud with SLG D11/SLG D12 115.2 Kbaud with SLG D10/SLG D10S Table 4- 1 Data transmission rate with MDS D1xx/MDS D2xx/MDS D3xx reading 2.5 ms/byte Writing 9.5 ms/byte Table 4- 2 Table 4- 3 2.5 ms/byte Transfer time for UID number (8 bytes) SLG Transmission time SLG D11S/SLG D12S 60 ms (at 19.2 Kbaud) SLG D11/SLG D12 60 ms (at 38.4 Kbaud) SLG D10/SLG D10S 50 ms (at 115.2 Kbaud) Traversing speed for SLG D1x / ANT Dx (with one transponder in the field) SLG D10 UID number (8 bytes) with MDS D4xx SLG D11 ANT D10* ANT D6 ANT D5 ANT D2 ANT D5 15 8.0 5.0 1.2 3.5 SLG D12 SLG D10S SLG D11S SLG D12S ANT D10* ANT D6 ANT D5 ANT D2 ANT D5 2.5 6.0 3.8 2.0 0.4 1.0 0.8 ISO tags, e.g. MDS D100 Read (with 4 bytes user data / 1 block) 10 6.0 3.5 1.2 1.6 1.2 6.5 4.0 2.2 0.4 3.0 1.4 Write (with 4 bytes user data / 1 block) 9 5.5 3.0 0.2 1.2 1.0 5.5 3.4 1.8 0.3 2.8 1.2 Read 7.5 (with 112 bytes of complete user data) 4.0 2.4 0.4 1.4 0.8 5.0 3.0 1.6 0.2 2.2 1.0 Write 2.0 (with 112 bytes of complete user data) 1.0 0.6 0.1 0.4 0.2 2.0 1.0 0.6 0.1 0.5 0.2 All values in the table in m/s * Traversing speed in lateral direction as for SLG D10 ANT D5/SLG D10S ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 31 Planning the MOBY D system 4.1 Fundamentals of application planning 4.1.7 Tolerance of tracking of pallet 0'6 'LUHFWLRQRIPRWLRQRIWKH0'6 &HQWHUOLQHEHWZHHQ0'6DQG6/* 7UDFNLQJWROHUDQFHEDQG : Figure 4-7 : :LGWKRIWKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ LQG\QDPLFPRGH Example ANT D5: Tolerance of tracking of pallet Determining the width of the transmission window The following approximation formula can be used for practical applications: % y/ W: Width of the transmission window in dynamic mode L: Length of the transmission window Figure 4-8 Formula: Width of the transmission window Tracking tolerance The width of the transmission window (W) is particularly important for the mechanical tracking tolerance. 32 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.2 Field data 4.2 Field data 4.2.1 Field data for MDS and SLG The field data of the MDS and SLG are shown in the table below. Thus it becomes particularly easy to select the right MDS and SLG. All the technical specifications listed are typical data and are applicable for the respective operating temperature of the MDS and SLG used (see Technical data of the MDS and SLG used). Tolerances of 20% are admissible due to production and temperature conditions. Note In order to ensure optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal. Note The field data for the following MDS is only valid with a corresponding order number: MDS D100 with order number 6GT2600-0AD10 MDS D124 with order number 6GT2600-0AC10 MDS D139 with order number 6GT2600-0AA10 MDS D160 with order number 6GT2600-0AB10 SLG D10/D10S with ANT D5 Table 4- 4 SLG D10/D10S with ANT D5 Diameter of the transmission window (Ld) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D100 320 0...400 500 MDS D124 300 0...200 280 MDS D139 320 0...400 500 MDS D160 300 0...130 180 MDS D324 300 0...200 280 MDS D424 300 0...200 280 MDS D428 300 0...120 160 MDS D460 300 0...120 160 MDS D165 320 0...350 450 MDS D200 320 0...400 500 MDS D261 320 0...300 400 All values are in mm MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 33 Planning the MOBY D system 4.2 Field data SLG D10/D10S with ANT D6 Table 4- 5 SLG D10/D10S with ANT D6 Length of the transmission window in the X direction (Lx) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) in the Y direction (Ly) MDS D100 520 420 0...550 650 MDS D124 500 400 0...220 300 MDS D139 520 420 0...500 600 MDS D160 500 400 0...130 180 MDS D324 500 400 0...200 280 MDS D424 500 400 0...220 300 MDS D428 500 400 0...100 150 MDS D460 500 500 0...100 150 MDS D165 520 420 0...400 500 MDS D200 520 420 0...500 600 MDS D261 520 420 0...350 400 All values are in mm SLG D10/D10S with ANT D10 Table 4- 6 SLG D10/D10S with ANT D10 Length of the transmission window in the X direction (Lx) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) in the Y direction (Ly) MDS D100 1050 350 0...500 600 MDS D124 1000 300 0...200 280 MDS D139 1050 350 0...450 550 MDS D160 1000 300 0...130 180 MDS D324 1000 300 0...200 280 MDS D424 1000 300 0...200 280 MDS D428 1000 300 0...100 150 MDS D460 1000 300 0...100 150 MDS D165 1050 350 0...350 450 MDS D200 1050 350 0...450 550 MDS D261 1050 350 0...300 400 All values are in mm 34 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.2 Field data SLG D11/D11S with ANT D2 Table 4- 7 SLG D11/D11S with ANT D2 Length of the transmission window (L) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D124 60 45...70 90 MDS D160 50 35...55 65 MDS D324 50 35...60 70 MDS D424 60 45...70 90 MDS D460 50 30...50 60 All values are in mm SLG D11/D11S with ANT D5 Table 4- 8 SLG D11/D11S with ANT D5 Diameter of the transmission window (Ld) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) MDS D100 300 0...300 380 MDS D124 280 0...150 220 MDS D139 300 0...280 350 MDS D160 280 0...75 110 MDS D324 280 0...120 160 MDS D424 280 0...150 200 MDS D428 280 0...70 100 MDS D460 280 0...70 100 MDS D165 300 0...220 300 MDS D200 300 0...220 320 MDS D261 300 0...200 280 All values are in mm MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 35 Planning the MOBY D system 4.2 Field data SLG D12/D12S/D12S plug-in version Table 4- 9 SLG D12/D12S Length of the transmission window in the X direction (Lx) Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) in the Y direction (Ly) MDS D100 120 60 0...160 220 MDS D124 120 60 0...70 100 MDS D139 120 60 0...120 150 MDS D160 120 60 0...45 65 MDS D324 120 60 0...60 80 MDS D424 120 60 0...70 100 MDS D428 120 60 0...40 60 MDS D460 120 60 0...40 60 MDS D165 120 60 0...120 150 MDS D200 120 60 0...120 160 MDS D261 120 60 0...100 140 All values are in mm 36 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.2 Field data 4.2.2 Minimum spacing Table 4- 10 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS (without multitag mode) SLG D10/D10S SLG D11/D11S MDS D100 / MDS D139 / MDS D165 / MDS D200 / MDS D261 MDS D124 / MDS D160 / MDS D324 / MDS D424 / MDS D428 / MDS D460 ANT D5 1m 0.8 m ANT D6 1.5 m 1.2 m ANT D10 2m 1.8 m --- 0.4 m 0.1 m 1m 0.8 m 0.3 m 0.5 m ANT D2 Horizontal main field Vertical main field ANT D5 SLG D12/SLG D12S/ SLG D12S (plug-in version) Reduction of the minimum spacing in multitag mode is permitted (SLG D10/SLG D11/SLG D12, RS232). Table 4- 11 Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (antennas) SLG D10/ SLG D10S SLG D11/ SLG D11S SLG D12/ SLG D12S/ SLG D12S (plug-in version) ANT D5 ANT D6 ANT D10 ANT D2 ANT D5 ANT D5 2m 2m 2m 1m 2m 1m ANT D6 2m 2m 2m 1m 2m 1m ANT D10 2m 2m 2m 1m 2m 1m ANT D2 1m 1m 1m 0.5 m 0.8 m 0.8 m ANT D5 2m 2m 2m 0.8 m 2m 1m SLG D12/SLG D12S/ 1m 1m 1m 0.8 m 1m 1m SLG D10/ SLG D10S SLG D11/SLG D11S SLG D12S (plug-in version) NOTICE Extension of the data transmission time if distance values are undershot If the distance values specified in the tables are undershot, it is possible that the inductive fields will be affected. In this case, the data transmission time can increase unpredictably or a command is aborted with an error. For this reason, please observe the values in the tables. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 37 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3.1 Overview The MDS and SLG are inductive devices. Any type of metal, in particular iron and ferromagnetic materials, in the vicinity of these devices will affect their operation. Some points need to be considered during planning and installation if the field data described in the preceding chapter are to retain their validity: The use of permissible mounting material The minimum distance between two antennas (see chapter "Antennas (Page 205)") The minimum distance between two adjacent MDS (see chapter "Mobile data storage units (Page 95)") The metal-free area for flush-mounting of SLGs in metal Mounting of multiple antennas on metal frames or racks The following sections describe the impact on the functionality of the MOBY D identification system when mounted in the vicinity of metal. 4.3.2 Permissible mounting material Securing SLG and antennas In order to comply with UL guidelines, the components must only be secured with the fixing materials described below. The positions of the fixing holes for the device are shown in the Dimension drawings section. Fixing to metal Table 4- 13 SLG/antenna Screw type1 SLG D11, SLG D11S; SLG D12, SLG D12S; Antenna duplexer M5 x 8, 8.8, DIN ISO 4017 SLG D10, SLG D10S M6 x 8, 8.8, DIN ISO 4017 Antenna ANT D5 M6 x 8, 8.8, DIN ISO 4017 ANT D6 antenna M6 x 8, 8.8, DIN ISO 4017 ANT D10 antenna M6 x 8, 8.8, DIN ISO 4017 1) 38 Fixing the SLG and antennas to metal Represents minimum length MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines Fixing to reinforced concrete Table 4- 14 Fixing the SLG and antennas to reinforced concrete SLG/antenna Screw type1 Plug type (nylon) SLG D11, SLG D11S; SLG D12, SLG D12S; Antenna duplexer 5 x 40 mm 6 mm, e.g. fischer S6, Type No.: 50106 SLG D10, SLG D10S 6 x 40 mm 8 mm, e.g. fischer S8, Type No.: 50108 Antenna ANT D5 5 x 40 mm 6 mm, e.g. fischer S6, Type No.: 50106 ANT D6 antenna 6 x 40 mm 8 mm, e.g. fischer S8, Type No.: 50108 ANT D10 antenna 5 x 40 mm 8 mm, e.g. fischer S8, Type No.: 50108 1) Represents minimum length WARNING Ensure that the wall or ceiling can hold four times the total weight of the device. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 39 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3.3 Metal-free area The metal-free area for the MDS Direct mounting of the MDS on metal or flush-mounting in metal is not permitted. If the MDS is directly mounted onto metal, all functions of the MDS will be disabled. The minimum distance between the MDS and metal is shown in the appropriate sections "Metal-free area" of the chapter Mobile data storage units (Page 95). The metal-free area for the SLG D12/SLG D12S When mounting the SLG, it is important to note that metal in the vicinity of the antennas can affect the field data. 40 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines ANT D5 ANT D5 must be mounted electrically isolated, direct mounting on metal is not permitted. The maximum field data (no interference = 100 %) are achieved when the antenna ANT D5 is mounted at a distance of 100 mm from metal (spacer kit 6GT2690-0AB00). 0HWDO K PP QRQPHWDOVSDFHU Figure 4-9 ANT D5: Insulated mounting on metal PP PP PP 0HWDO 1RQPHWDOVSDFHU Figure 4-10 ANT D5: Installation in metal See also Subsection Influencing the transmission window. ANT D6/D10 Mounting on metal permitted. Typical distances from metal are indicated in the section Metal-free area in the chapter write/read devices. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 41 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines SLG D12/SLG D12S With SLG D12/SLG D12S with integral antenna, the height of the housing provides sufficient distance from the metal base; the device can be mounted directly onto metal. In the case of flush-mounting, you must however comply with the specified lateral distance to metal. 0HWDO K K +HLJKWRIWKH6/* PP Figure 4-11 Mounting on metal: SLG D12/SLG D12S E E D D 0HWDO DE 0HWDOIUHHGLVWDQFHV PP Figure 4-12 42 Flush-mounting in metal: SLG D12/SLG D12S MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3.4 Influences affecting the transmission window In general, the following points should be considered when mounting MOBY D components: Flush-mounting of components in metal reduces the field data. When working inside the transmission window, it should be ensured that no metal rails or closed conductor loops protrude into the transmission field. They would impair the field profile. It is recommended that a test is performed in critical applications. In order to ensure optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal (see the following tables). Therefore it must always be operated at a distance of 100 mm from metal. The impact of metal on the field data (Sg, Sa, Lx, Ly) is shown in tabular and graphical format in this section. The values in the tables describe field data reduction as a percentage (100% means no impact). MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 43 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines SLG D12/D12S Table 4- 15 Reduction of field data by metal (in %): MDS and SLG D12/D12S Transponder MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D139 MDS D160 Without metal On metal Flush-mounted In metal (50 mm allround) Without metal 100 80 70 On metal; distance 20 mm 70 70 60 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 20 mm 65 55 55 Without metal 100 80 70 On metal; distance 25 mm 80 65 55 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm 65 55 50 Without metal 100 65 65 On metal; distance 30 mm 90 65 65 Without metal 100 80 80 On metal; distance 25 mm 100 80 80 Without metal 100 80 70 On metal; distance 25 mm 80 65 55 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm 65 55 50 Without metal 100 80 70 On metal; distance 25 mm 80 65 55 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm 65 55 50 MDS D428 Without metal 100 80 80 On metal 80 70 70 MDS D460 Without metal 100 80 80 On metal; distance 25 mm 80 70 70 MDS D200 Without metal 100 80 70 On metal; distance 20 mm 70 70 60 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 20 mm 65 55 55 MDS D324 MDS D424 44 SLG D12/D12S MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines SLG D11/D11S with ANT D5 Table 4- 16 Reduction of field data by metal (in %): MDS and SLG D11/D11S with ANT D5 Transponder MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D324 MDS D424 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D200 1) 1) SLG D11/D11S with ANT D5 On metal 100 mm distance Flush-mounted in metal 100 mm distance (150 mm all-round) Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 20 mm 60 55 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 20 mm 45 40 Without metal 100 95 On metal, distance 25 mm 60 55 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm 40 35 Without metal 100 95 On metal, distance 30 mm 80 75 Without metal 100 90 On metal; distance 25 mm 55 50 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm -- -- Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 25 mm 60 55 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm 40 35 Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 25 mm 60 55 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm 40 35 Without metal 100 95 On metal 40 35 Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 25 mm 40 35 Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 20 mm 60 55 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 20 mm 45 40 Values apply to metal surfaces greater than 100 mm x 100 mm MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 45 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines SLG D10/D10S with ANT D5 Table 4- 17 Reduction of field data by metal (in %): MDS and SLG D10/D10S with ANT D5 Transponder MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D324 MDS D424 MDS D428 1) On metal Flush-mounted in metal (150 mm all-round) Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 20 mm 65 60 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 20 mm 45 40 Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 25 mm 85 80 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm 65 60 Without metal 100 95 On metal, distance 30 mm 90 85 Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 25 mm 70 65 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm 25 20 Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 25 mm 75 70 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm -- -- Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 25 mm 75 70 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm -- -- 100 95 -- -- 100 95 -- -- Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 20 mm 65 60 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 20 mm -- -- Without metal On metal MDS D460 Without metal On metal; distance 25 mm MDS D200 1) 46 SLG D10/D10S with ANT D5 Values apply to metal surfaces greater than 100 mm x 100 mm MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines SLG D10/D10S with ANT D6 Table 4- 18 Reduction of field data by metal (in %): MDS and SLG D10/D10S with ANT D6 Transponder MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D324 MDS D424 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D200 1) 1) SLG D10/D10S with ANT D6 On metal Flush-mounted in metal (200 mm all-round) Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 20 mm 65 60 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 20 mm -- -- Without metal 100 95 On metal, distance 25 mm 80 75 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm -- -- Without metal 100 90 On metal, distance 30 mm 80 70 Without metal 100 90 On metal; distance 25 mm 60 55 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm -- -- Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 25 mm 75 70 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm -- -- Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 25 mm 75 70 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm -- -- Without metal 100 95 On metal 70 65 Without metal 100 95 On metal 70 65 Without metal 100 95 On metal; distance 20 mm 65 60 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 20 mm -- -- Values apply to metal surfaces greater than 100 mm x 100 mm MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 47 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines SLG D10/D10S with ANT D10 Table 4- 19 Reduction of field data by metal (in %): MDS and SLG D10/D10S with ANT D10 Transponder MDS D100 MDS D124 MDS D139 MDS D160 MDS D324 MDS D424 MDS D428 MDS D460 MDS D200 1) 1) SLG D10/D10S with ANT D10 On metal Flush-mounted in metal (200 mm all-round) Without metal 100 90 On metal; distance 20 mm 50 40 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 20 mm -- -- Without metal 100 90 On metal, distance 25 mm 70 60 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm -- -- Without metal 100 90 On metal, distance 30 mm 80 70 Without metal 100 90 On metal; distance 25 mm 65 55 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm -- -- Without metal 100 90 On metal; distance 25 mm 70 60 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm -- -- Without metal 100 90 On metal; distance 25 mm 70 60 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 25 mm -- -- Without metal 100 90 On metal 50 40 Without metal 100 90 On metal; distance 25 mm 50 40 Without metal 100 90 On metal; distance 20 mm 50 40 Flush-mounted in metal; distance all-round 20 mm -- -- Values apply to metal surfaces greater than 100 mm x 100 mm Note The values specified in the tables must be complied with. The inductive fields may be affected if the distance is smaller. In this case, the data transfer time would increase unpredictably or a command would be aborted with an error. If the distance is smaller, it is recommended that a test is performed. 48 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines From the following diagrams, you can see the impact on the transmission window based on the example of SLG D10 ANT D5 with MDS D139. The percentages describe the reduction in field data for ANT D5 and MDS in a metal environment (100% corresponds to no impact). 4.3.4.1 MDS in metal-free environment 0'6' PP $17b'[ 0HWDO 1RQPHWDOVSDFHU 0'6' PP PP 0HWDO PP 1RQPHWDOVSDFHU Figure 4-13 MDS in metal-free environment MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 49 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3.4.2 MDS in the vicinity of metal 0HWDO 1RQPHWDO PP 0'6' PP $17b'[ 0HWDO 1RQPHWDOVSDFHU 0HWDO 1RQPHWDO PP 0'6' PP PP 0HWDO PP 1RQPHWDOVSDFHU Figure 4-14 50 MDS in the vicinity of metal MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3.5 Reduction of interference due to metal Interference due to metal rack Interference due to metal rack 0HWDOUDFN Problem 3ODWH 1RQPHWDOVSDFHU A metal rack is located above the transmission window of ANT D5. This affects the entire field. In particular, the transmission window between ANT Dx and the MDS is reduced. 0'6 6D $17' 0HWDO Remedy: 0HWDOVXSSRUW 3ODWH 1RQPHWDOVSDFHU The transmission window is no longer affected if ANT Dx is mounted differently. 0'6 6D $17' 0HWDO MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 51 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines Flush-mounting Flush-mounting Problem Flush-mounting of MDS and SLG / ANT Dx is possible in principle. However, the size of the transmission window is significantly reduced. The following measures can be used to counteract the reduction of the window: $17b'[ Remedy: [PP PP $17b '[ PP PHWDO 6SDFHUV RUVSDFHUNLW Replace the non-metal spacer below the MDS with a larger one. MDS and/or SLG / ANT Dx must be at least 50 mm higher than the surrounding metal. (At a distance x 600 mm from metal, the field is no longer noticeably affected.) Remedy: D E 52 D $17'[ E Increase the non-metal distances a and b. As a rule of thumb: Select values for a and b that are larger by a factor of 2 to 3 Increasing a and b has a greater effect for antennas/MDS with a large limit distance than for antennas/MDS with a small limit distance. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3.6 Mounting of multiple antennas on or between metal frames Mounting of multiple antennas on or between metal frames If closed conductor loops (metal frames, guides with cross struts) are located within the area of the antenna's magnetic field, some of the energy will be coupled into these. This effect results in: non-configurable field geometries undesirerd field propagation ("transformer effect") The undesired field propagation would interfere with other antennas in the reception field or reach other MDSs outside the configured fields. To prevent these effects, care must be taken to avoid closed conductor loops in the transmission range of the antennas or to interrupt them non-metallically. 1RQPHWDOOLF VSDFHU &URVVVWUXWV PHWDO &RQYH\RUEHOW FKDLQFRQYH\RU $17' Figure 4-15 $17' Conveyors/metal frames with non-metallic spacers MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 53 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines 4.3.7 Installation and interconnection of 2, 3 or 4 MOBY D antennas to one SLG D10/D10S write/read device. Possible configurations of the antennas The antenna installations described here have been designed for reading smartlabels (transponders) on goods on conveyor belts, conveyor systems or pallets. A prerequisite is that there are no magnetically conducting materials (e.g. metal) in the vicinity of the antenna or the label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ystem Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines Figure 4-16 Possible configuration of SLG D10/D10S with ANT D5/D6/D10 Installation examples $17' PLQPP PLQPP &RQYH\RUEHOW Figure 4-17 Installation example with 2 ANT D6 (portal) $17' &RQYH\RUEHOW $17' Figure 4-18 Installation example with ANT D6 (C arrangement) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 55 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines $17' &RQYH\RUEHOW $17' Figure 4-19 Installation example with ANT D6 (tunnel) Note The minimum spacings between the antennas for operation with only one reader may be less than the distances described because this configuration has the same phase. Configuring instructions The antenna installation described below enables detection of transponders moving horizontally through the installation. Depending on the installation (antennas exactly opposite each other or offset in parallel), the label is aligned in parallel with the antennas or arbitrarily. The size of the sensing range depends on the label alignment: 56 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines NOTICE It must be noted that the overall sensing range of the antennas is greater than the sensing range to be configured. This means there can be label alignments where even labels outside the sensing range will be detected. Labels aligned in parallel with the antennas, for example, can also be detected at larger distances beside or outside the antenna range. For this reason, goods with labels must not be stored within a distance of up to 0.5 m from the installation. If this cannot be complied with, the antennas must be shielded. To achieve three-dimensional detection of the labels in the sensing range, the following requirements must be met: The gate width must be less than or equal to 800 mm. The antenna size of the labels must be at least the size of an ISO card (85 mm x 54 mm). The distance from label to label must be greater than 100 mm. The distance from label to label can be reduced if the gate width is correspondingly reduced. This applies especially for distances under 50 mm There must be no more than 16 labels within the sensing range of the antennas at the same time. The number of labels can be increased if the gate width is correspondingly reduced and the maximum speed appropriately adapted. The maximum speed of the labels must not exceed 1 m/s. (This depends on the number and alignment of the labels, the number of data blocks to be processed, the data protocol required and the label type). To the front and sides of the antenna, there must be a distance of more than 150 mm to metal parts. There must be no interference to the write/read device from other electrical equipment in the surrounding area. Note The SLG D10S is not multitag-enabled. Components required For installation with 2 antennas (gate) 3 antennas (C arrangement) 4 antennas (tunnel) the following components are required: MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 57 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines Number for installation with 2 ant. 1 3 ant. 1 Component Order No. 4 ant. 1 Basic unit: SLG D10 ( PC) SLG D10S ASM 4xx/RF1xx) SLG D10S: 6GT2698-1AA00 SLG D10S: 6GT2698-2AA00 optionally: ASM 452: 6GT2002-0EB20 ASM 473: 6GT2002-0HA10 ASM 475: 6GT2002-0GA10 ASM 456: 6GT2002-0ED00 RF170C: 6GT2002-0HD00/ 6GT2002-1HD00 RF180C: 6GT2002-0JD00 RF182C: 6GT2002-0JD10 2 3 4 Antenna ANT D5 / D6 / D10 optionally: ANT D5: 6GT2698-5AA00 ANT D6: 6GT2698-5AB00 ANT D10: 6GT2698-5AF00 2 3 4 With ANT D5 if required: spacer kit for ANT D5 6GT2690-0AB00 2 3 4 With ANT D6 if required: cover 6GT2698-5AD00 1 2 3 Antenna duplexer 6GT2603-0AC00 1 1 1 MOBY wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems EU: 6GT2898-0AA00 UK: 6GT2898-0AA10 US: 6GT2898-0AA20 1 1 1 24 V connecting cable, 5 m in length 6GT2491-1HH50 1 1 1 Connecting cable: SLG D10 PC or SLG D10S ASM 4xx/RF1xx 6GT2691-0B ... optionally: 6GT2491-0E ... 6GT2491-1C ... 6GT2691-0F ... 6GT2691-0FH20 Installation information The cables on the antennas and the antenna duplexer are 3.3 m or 10.5 m long respectively. The write/read device must be installed in the vicinity of the antennas. In the case of larger distances between the write/read device and the antennas, the antenna cable can be increased by 7.2 m with the extension (6GT2 691-0DH72). This results in shorter ranges. 58 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines Metal-free area To guarantee perfect functioning of the individual installation versions, all larger metal parts in the vicinity of the antennas must be removed. Figure 4-20 Metal-free space _side view (using the example of tunnel arrangement on a conveyor belt) 0D[ $QQWHQDEHORZEDQG Figure 4-21 Metal-free space _plan view (using the example of tunnel arrangement on a conveyor belt) Metal in the vicinity of the antennas If metal in the vicinity of the antennas cannot be avoided, the following must be noted: There must be a minimum allround gap of 100 mm between the antenna and metal. Serious loss of sensing range must be expected above 50 mm. There is no discernible influence at distances greater than 150 mm from the metal. The influence of the metal depends heavily on its size and shape. Thin metal rods have less influence on the magnetic field than large surfaces. Larger metal surfaces (edge length > 50 mm) in parallel with the antennas or labels result in a short-circuit of the magnetic lines of force. As a result, the labels cannot be read. Metal parts under the conveyor belt change the direction of the magnetic lines of force. Serious loss of sensing range must be expected as a result. Horizontally aligned labels cannot be read in such cases. The metal parts must not form closed loops or circuits. If necessary, these must be electrically interrupted at one point. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 59 Planning the MOBY D system 4.3 Installation guidelines The metal parts in the immediate vicinity of the antenna must be grounded in a mesh with a good HF connection. Since the write/read device is installed in a metal housing, and the antennas can couple into the cables to the write/read device, it must be installed at a distance of at least 500 mm from the antennas. Notes on installing and laying the antenna cable To suppress possible interference, an EMC hinged ferrite choke must be fitted to the antenna cables (as well as the antenna cable between the SLG and the antenna duplexer). The coaxial cable must be wound tightly at least four times through the EMC ring core. The maximum distance between the connecting plug for the write/read device or the antenna duplexer and the ring core must be 100 mm. The antenna cable must always be run vertically from the antennas. A minimum distance of 200 mm to the antennas must be observed with further cable routing. Otherwise, performance losses must be expected. There must be a distance of at least 300 mm between antenna cables and parallel power cables. Unrequired cable length must be secured in a bundle with a diameter of 100 to 150 mm. If the standard antenna cable is too short, it can be increased by 7.20 m with the extension. Slight range losses must be expected here. To achieve optimal read ranges, the antenna cable should not be shortened or lengthened. 60 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS 4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS MDS D100 (6GT2600-0AD10) The enclosure of the MDS D100 is made of PC (polycarbonate). MDS D100 is resistant to the substances specified in the following table. Table 4- 20 Chemical resistance of MDS D100 Substance Evaluation Acetone Alcohol Aliphatic hydrocarbons Aromatic hydrocarbons Hot water (hydrolysis resistance) Mineral lubricants Oxidizing acids Perchloroethylene Petroleum spirit Strong alkalis Strong mineral acids Strong organic acids Trichloroethylene Weak alkalis Weak mineral acids Weak organic acids Abbreviations: Resistant Limited resistance Not resistant MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 61 Planning the MOBY D system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS MDS D100 (6GT2600-0AD00) and MDS D200 The enclosure of the MDS is made of PVC. The MDS are resistant to the substances specified in the following table. Table 4- 21 Chemical resistance of MDS D100/D200 Substance Concentration Acetic acid, aqueous solution 5% Ethanol, aqueous solution 60% Ethylene glycol 50% Fuel B according to ISO 1817 Human sweat Saline solution 5% Sodium carbonate, aqueous solution 5% Sugared water 10% (Reference: ISO 10373 / ISO 7810) 62 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS MDS D139 (6GT2600-0AA10) MDS D124 (6GT2600-0AC10) MDS D160 (6GT2600-0AB10) The housing of the heat-resistant data storage unit MDS D139 is made of polyphenylene sulfide (PPS). The chemical resistance of the data storage unit is excellent. No solvent is known that can dissolve the plastic at temperatures below 200 C. A reduction in the mechanical properties has been observed in aqueous solutions of hydrochloric acid (HCl) and nitric acid (HNO3) at 80 C. The excellent resistance to all fuel types including methanol is a particular characteristic. The following table provides an overview of the chemicals investigated. Table 4- 22 Chemical resistance of MDS D139, MDS D124, MDS D160 Substance Evaluation Test conditions Time [days] Temperature [C] (FAM-DIN 51604-A) Toluol 180 80 / 1, 1, 1-trichloroethane xylene 180 80 + Acetone 180 55 + Anti-freeze 180 120 + Brake fluid 40 80 + Butanon-2 (methyl ethyl ketone) 180 60 + Calcium chloride (saturated) 40 80 + Caustic soda (30 percent) 40 93 + Diesel fuel 180 80 + Diethyl ether 40 23 + Engine oil 40 80 + Frigen 113 40 23 + Hydrochloric acid (10 percent) 40 80 - Kerosine 40 60 + Methanol 180 60 + n-Butanol (butyl alcohol) 180 80 + n-butyl acetate 180 80 + Nitric acid (10 percent) 40 23 + Sodium chloride (saturated) 40 80 + Sodium hydroxide (30 percent) 180 80 + Sodium hypochlorite (5 percent) 30 180 80 80 / - 40 40 40 23 80 23 + / + Sulphuric acid (10 percent) (10 percent) (30 percent) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 63 Planning the MOBY D system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS Substance Evaluation Test conditions Time [days] Temperature [C] Tested fuels: 40 80 + Zinc chloride (saturated) 180 180 180 40 80 75 80 80 / + + + Assessment: 64 + Resistant, weight gain < 3 % or weight loss < 0.5 % and/or reduction in fracture resistance < 15 % / Limited resistance, weight gain 3 to 8 % or weight loss 0.5 to 3 % and/or reduction in fracture resistance 15 to 30 % - Not resistant, weight gain > 8 % or weight loss > 3 % and/or reduction in fracture resistance > 30 % MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS MDS D124 (6GT2600-0AC00) MDS D324 MDS D424 MDS D460 The enclosure of the MDS is made of epoxy resin. The following table provides an overview of the chemical resistance. Table 4- 23 Chemical resistance of MDS D124, MDS D324, MDS D424, MDS D460 Chemical compound Concentration 20 C Acetic acid 100 % 40 C Ammonia liquid, water-free Benzol, benzoic acid Borax Boric acid Brine Bromine, liquid, bromine water Butyric acid 60 C 100 % Carbonate (ammonium, sodium, etc.) Chlorine water (saturated solution) Chlorine, liquid Chlorobenzene Chloroform Chromate (potassium, sodium, etc.) Up to 50% Chromic acid Up to 30 % Citric acid Cyanide (potassium, sodium, etc.) Diethylene glycol Dioxane Ethanol Fixer Fluoride (ammonium, potassium, sodium, etc.) Formaldehyde 50 % Formic acid 50 % Gasoline, aromatic-free/containing benzol Glycerine Glycol Hydrochloric acid, nitric acid 10 % Hydrofluoric acid Up to 40 % Hydrogen peroxide 30 % Hydroxide (sodium, potassium) 40 % Iodide (potassium, sodium, etc.) Lactic acid 100 % Methanol 100 % Mineral oils MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 65 Planning the MOBY D system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS Chemical compound Concentration 20 C Nitrate (ammonium, potassium, etc.) 60 C Nitroglycerine Phosphate (ammonium, sodium, etc.) Phosphoric acid 40 C 50 % Propanol Silicic acid Soap solution Sulfide (ammonium, sodium, etc.) Sulphate (ammonium, sodium, etc.) Sulphur dioxide 100 % Sulphuric acid 40 % Tartaric acid Trichloroethylene Turpentine Urine, uric acid Abbreviations: 66 Resistant Limited resistance Not resistant MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.4 Chemical resistance of the MDS MDS D428 The enclosure of the MDS D428 comprises: the hood: PA6.6 GF30 the screw: Stainless steel The MDS D428 is resistant to the substances specified in the following table. Table 4- 24 Chemical resistance of MDS D428 Substance Concentration Acetone Alcohol Aliphatic hydrocarbons Aromatic hydrocarbons Hot water (hydrolysis resistance) Mineral lubricants Oxidizing acids Perchloroethylene Petroleum spirit Strong alkalis Strong mineral acids Strong organic acids Trichloroethylene Weak alkalis Weak mineral acids Weak organic acids Abbreviations: Resistant Limited resistance Not resistant MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 67 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines 4.5 EMC Guidelines 4.5.1 Overview These EMC Guidelines answer the following questions: Why are EMC guidelines necessary? What types of external interference have an impact on the system? How can interference be prevented? How can interference be eliminated? Which standards relate to EMC? Examples of interference-free plant design The description is intended for "qualified personnel": Project engineers and planners who plan system configurations with RFID modules and have to observe the necessary guidelines. Fitters and service engineers who install the connecting cables in accordance with this description or who rectify defects in this area in the event of interference. NOTICE Failure to observe notices drawn to the reader's attention can result in dangerous conditions in the plant or the destruction of individual components or the entire plant. 68 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines 4.5.2 What does EMC mean? The increasing use of electrical and electronic devices is accompanied by: Higher component density More switched power electronics Increasing switching rates Lower power consumption of components due to steeper switching edges The higher the degree of automation, the greater the risk of interaction between devices. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical or electronic device to operate satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment without affecting or interfering with the environment over and above certain limits. EMC can be broken down into three different areas: Intrinsic immunity to interference: immunity to internal electrical disturbance Immunity to external interference: immunity to external electromagnetic disturbance Degree of interference emission: emission of interference and its effect on the electrical environment All three areas are considered when testing an electrical device. The RFID modules are tested for conformity with the limit values required by the CE and RTTE guidelines. Since the RFID modules are merely components of an overall system, and sources of interference can arise as a result of combining different components, certain guidelines have to be followed when setting up a plant. EMC measures usually consist of a complete package of measures, all of which need to be implemented in order to ensure that the plant is immune to interference. Note The plant manufacturer is responsible for the observance of the EMC guidelines; the plant operator is responsible for radio interference suppression in the overall plant. All measures taken when setting up the plant prevent expensive retrospective modifications and interference suppression measures. The plant operator must comply with the locally applicable laws and regulations. They are not covered in this document. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 69 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines 4.5.3 Basic rules It is often sufficient to follow a few elementary rules in order to ensure electromagnetic compatiblity (EMC). The following rules must be observed: Shielding by enclosure Protect the device against external interference by installing it in a cabinet or housing. The housing or enclosure must be connected to the chassis ground. Use metal plates to shield against electromagnetic fields generated by inductances. Use metal connector housings to shield data conductors. Wide-area ground connection Plan a meshed grounding concept. Bond all passive metal parts to chassis ground, ensuring large-area and low-HFimpedance contact. Establish a large-area connection between the passive metal parts and the central grounding point. Don't forget to include the shielding bus in the chassis ground system. That means the actual shielding busbars must be connected to ground by large-area contact. Aluminium parts are not suitable for ground connections. Plan the cable installation Break the cabling down into cable groups and install these separately. Always route power cables, signal cables and HF cables through separated ducts or in separate bundles. Feed the cabling into the cabinet from one side only and, if possible, on one level only. Route the signal cables as close as possible to chassis surfaces. Twist the feed and return conductors of separately installed cables. Routing HF cables: avoid parallel routing of HF cables. Do not route cables through the antenna field. Shielding for the cables Shield the data cables and connect the shield at both ends. Shield the analog cables and connect the shield at one end, e.g. on the drive unit. Always apply large-area connections between the cable shields and the shielding bus at the cabinet inlet and make the contact with clamps. Feed the connected shield through to the module without interruption. Use braided shields, not foil shields. 70 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines Line and signal filter Use only line filters with metal housings Connect the filter housing to the cabinet chassis using a large-area low-HF-impedance connection. Never fix the filter housing to a painted surface. Fix the filter at the control cabinet inlet or in the direction of the source. 4.5.4 Propagation of electromagnetic interference Three components have to be present for interference to occur in a system: Interference source Coupling path Interference sink ,QWHUIHUHQFHVRXUFH GHYLFHHPLWWLQJ LQWHUIHUHQFH HJGULYHXQLW Figure 4-22 &RXSOLQJSDWK HJFRQQHFWLQJFDEOH ,QWHUIHUHQFHVLQN GHYLFHDIIHFWHGE\ LQWHUIHUHQFH HJUHDGHU Propagation of interference If one of the components is missing, e.g. the coupling path between the interference source and the interference sink, the interference sink is unaffected, even if the interference source is transmitting a high level of noise. The EMC measures are applied to all three components, in order to prevent malfunctions due to interference. When setting up a plant, the manufacturer must take all possible measures in order to prevent the occurrence of interference sources: Only devices fulfilling limit class A of VDE 0871 may be used in a plant. Interference suppression measures must be introduced on all interference-emitting devices. This includes all coils and windings. The design of the system must be such that mutual interference between individual components is precluded or kept as small as possible. Information and tips for plant design are given in the following sections. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 71 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines Interference sources In order to achieve a high level of electromagnetic compatibility and thus a very low level of disturbance in a plant, it is necessary to recognize the most frequent interference sources. These must then be eliminated by appropriate measures. Table 4- 25 Interference sources: origin and effect Interference source Interference results from Effect on the interference sink Contactors, electronic valves Contacts System disturbances Coils Magnetic field Electrical motor Collector Electrical field Winding Magnetic field Contacts Electrical field Transformer Magnetic field, system disturbance, transient currents Power supply unit, switchedmode Circuit Electrical and magnetic field, system disturbance High-frequency appliances Circuit Electromagnetic field Transmitter (e.g. service radio) Antenna Electromagnetic field Electric welding device 72 Ground or reference potential Voltage difference difference Transient currents Operator Static charge Electrical discharge currents, electrical field Power cable Current flow Electrical and magnetic field, system disturbance High-voltage cable Voltage difference Electrical field MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines What interference can affect RFID? Interference source Cause Remedy Replace the power supply Ferrite in the supply line Switched-mode power supply Interference emitted from the current infeed Interference injected through the cables connected in series Cable is inadequately shielded Better cable shielding The reader is not connected to ground. Ground the reader HF interference over the antennas caused by another reader Position the antennas further apart. Erect suitable damping materials between the antennas. Reduce the power of the readers. Please note the instructions in the Section Installation guidelines/reducing the influence of metal from external noise sources (frequency converters, fluorescent lamps, etc.) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Minimize sources of noise Shield Compensation Point-to-point grounding 73 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines Coupling paths A coupling path has to be present before the disturbance emitted by the interference source can affect the system. There are four ways in which interference can be coupled in: *DOYDQLFFRXSOLQJSDWK , 1 7 ( 5 ) ( 5 ( 1 & ( 5),' 5HDGHU &DSDFLWLYHFRXSOLQJSDWK 5),' 5HDGHU ,QGXFWLYHFRXSOLQJSDWK 5),' 5HDGHU 6 2 8 5 & ( , 1 7 ( 5 ) ( 5 ( 1 & ( 6 , 1 . 5DGLDWLRQFRXSOLQJ 5),' 5HDGHU Figure 4-23 Ways in which interference can be coupled in When RFID modules are used, different components in the overall system can act as a coupling path: Table 4- 26 74 Causes of coupling paths Coupling path Invoked by Conductors and cables Incorrect or inappropriate installation Missing or incorrectly connected shield Inappropriate physical arrangement of cables Control cabinet or housing Missing or incorrectly wired equalizing conductor Missing or incorrect earthing Inappropriate physical arrangement Components not mounted securely Unfavorable cabinet configuration MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines 4.5.5 Cabinet configuration The influence of the user in the configuration of an electromagnetically compatible plant encompasses cabinet configuration, cable installation, ground connections and correct shielding of cables. Note For information about electromagnetically compatible cabinet configuration, please consult the installation guidelines for SIMATIC PLCs. Shielding by enclosure Magnetic and electrical fields and electromagnetic waves can be kept away from the interference sink by using a metal enclosure. The easier the induced interference current can flow, the greater the intrinsic weakening of the interference field. All enclosures and metal panels in the cabinet should therefore be connected in a manner allowing good conductance. Figure 4-24 Shielding by enclosure If the control cabinet panels are insulated from each other, a high-frequency-conducting connection can be established using ribbon cables and high-frequency terminals or HF conducting paste. The larger the area of the connection, the greater the high-frequency conductivity. This is not possible using single-wire connections. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 75 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines Prevention of interference by optimum configuration Good interference suppression can be achieved by installing SIMATIC PLCs on conducting mounting plates (unpainted). When setting up the control cabinet, interference can be prevented easily by observing certain guidelines. Power components (transformers, drive units, load power supply units) should be arranged separately from the control components (relay control unit, SIMATIC S7). As a rule: The effect of the interference decreases as the distance between the interference source and interference sink increases. The interference can be further decreased by installing grounded shielding plates. The load connections and power cables should be installed separately from the signal cables with a minimum clearance of 10 cm. 3RZHUVXSSO\ &&(8 6KLHOG SODWH 'ULYH Figure 4-25 76 Prevention of interference by optimum configuration MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines Filtering of the supply voltage External interference from the mains can be prevented by installing line filters. Correct installation is extremely important, in addition to appropriate dimensioning. It is essential that the line filter is mounted directly at the cabinet inlet. As a result, interference is filtered promptly at the inlet, and is not conducted through the cabinet. &RUUHFW ,QFRUUHFW /LQHILOWHU ,V /LQHILOWHU ,V ,F LQWHUIHUHQFHFXUUHQW Figure 4-26 Filtering of the supply voltage MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 77 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines 4.5.6 Prevention of interference sources A high level of immunity to interference can be achieved by avoiding interference sources. All switched inductances are frequent sources of interference in plants. Suppression of inductance Relays, contactors, etc. generate interference voltages and must therefore be suppressed using one of the circuits below. Even with small relays, interference voltages of up to 800 V occur on 24 V coils, and interference voltages of several kV occur on 230 V coils when the coil is switched. The use of freewheeling diodes or RC circuits prevents interference voltages and thus stray interference on conductors installed parallel to the coil conductor. 5HOD\FRLOV 9DOYHV &RQWDFWRUV %UDNHV Figure 4-27 Suppression of inductance Note All coils in the cabinet should be suppressed. The valves and motor brakes are frequently forgotten. Fluorescent lamps in the control cabinet should be tested in particular. 78 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines 4.5.7 Equipotential bonding Potential differences between different parts of a plant can arise due to the different design of the plant components and different voltage levels. If the plant components are connected across signal cables, transient currents flow across the signal cables. These transient currents can corrupt the signals. Proper equipotential bonding is thus essential. The equipotential bonding conductor must have a sufficiently large cross section (at least 10 mm2). The distance between the signal cable and the associated equipotential bonding conductor must be as small as possible (antenna effect). A fine-strand conductor must be used (better high-frequency conductivity). When connecting the equipotential bonding conductors to the centralized equipotential bonding strip (EBS), the power components and non-power components must be combined. The equipotential bonding conductors of the separate modules must lead directly to the equipotential bonding strip. &DELQHW &DELQHW 3RZHUVXSSO\ 'HYLFH ,QFRUUHFW 'HYLFH 'HYLFH 3/& ,QFRUUHFW (%6 'ULYH Figure 4-28 Equipotential bonding (EBS = Equipotential bonding strip) The better the equipotential bonding in a plant, the smaller the chance of interference due to fluctuations in potential. Equipotential bonding should not be confused with protective earthing of a plant. Protective earthing prevents the occurrence of excessive shock voltages in the event of equipment faults whereas equipotential bonding prevents the occurrence of differences in potential. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 79 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines 4.5.8 Ground-fault monitoring with MOBY / 5 9 5 $60 9 5 5 / 6/* 1RQJURXQGHG SRZHUVXSSO\XQLW *URXQGIDXOWPRQLWRULQJGHYLFH ,IDYROWDJHLPEDODQFHRFFXUVRQFRQGXFWRUV/RU/ ZLWKUHIHUHQFHWRJURXQGWKHFLUFXLWZLOOEH LQWHUUXSWHG Figure 4-29 80 ,QWHUIDFHWRFRPSXWHURU3& )RUFRQQHFWLQJWRDJURXQGHGFRPSXWHU RU3&JDOYDQLFGHFRXSOLQJ HJRSWRFRXSOHUV PXVWH[LVWLQWKHFRQQHFWLRQ Schematic diagram of ground-fault monitoring MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines 4.5.9 Cable shielding Signal cables must be shielded in order to prevent coupling of interference. The best shielding is achieved by installing the cables in steel tubes. However, this is only necessary if the signal cable is routed through an environment prone to particular interference. It is usually adequate to use cables with braided shields. In either case, however, correct connection is vital for effective shielding. Note An unconnected or incorrectly connected shield has no shielding effect. As a rule: For analog signal cables, the shield should be connected at one end on the receiver side For digital signals, the shield should be connected to the enclosure at both ends Since interference signals are frequently within the HF range (> 10 kHz), a large-area HFproof shield contact is necessary Figure 4-30 Cable shielding The shielding bus should be connected to the control cabinet enclosure in a manner allowing good conductance (large-area contact) and must be situated as close as possible to the cable inlet. The cable insulation must be removed and the cable clamped to the shielding bus (high-frequency clamp) or secured using cable ties. Care should be taken to ensure that the connection allows good conductance. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 81 Planning the MOBY D system 4.5 EMC Guidelines &DEOHWLH 5HPRYHSDLQW Figure 4-31 Connection of shielding bus The shielding bus must be connected to the PE busbar. If shielded cables have to be interrupted, the shield must be continued via the corresponding connector housing. Only suitable connectors may be used for this purpose. 6KLHOGWXUQHGXSVLGHGRZQ WKURXJKrDQG FRQQHFWHGWRFRQQHFWRU KRXVLQJ 5XEEHUVOHHYH Figure 4-32 Interruption of shielded cables If intermediate connectors, which do not have a suitable shield connection, are used, the shield must be continued by fixing cable clamps at the point of interruption. This ensures a large-area, HF-conducting contact. 82 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.6 MOBY shield concept 4.6 MOBY shield concept In MOBY, the data are transferred between the ASM and SLG at different baudrates over an RS 422 interface. The distance between the ASM and SLG can be up to 1000 m. In terms of cabling, MOBY must be handled in the same manner as a data processing system. Particular attention must be paid to the shield route for all data cables. In the following drawings, the most important aspects of reliable installation are shown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sN9RQWKH6/*FDEOHFDQWKHQ EHUHOLDEO\GHIOHFWHG:LWKORQJFDEOHVRULQDKLJKLQWHUIHUHQFH 7KH6/*PXVWEHJURXQGHGDWWKH LQGXVWULDOHQYLURQPHQWFDUHIXOFRQQHFWLRQRIWKHVKLHOGLV JURXQGLQJVFUHZSURYLGHG LPSRUWDQW Figure 4-33 Basic shield connection Connection of other modules To divert fault currents that can occur on the connecting cable on the SLG, the same procedure must be followed as shown in the figure above. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 83 Planning the MOBY D system 4.6 MOBY shield concept Configuration of an S7-300 with MOBY When the SLG is connected to ASM 475, the cable shield must be connected to a shield terminal. Shield terminals and holding clips are standard components of the product spectrum of S7-300. +ROGLQJFOLS 7HUPLQDOHOHPHQW &DEOHWR6/* Figure 4-34 &DEOHWR6/* Configuration of ASM 475 with shield connecting element Cable assembly for ASM 475 To achieve electromagnetic compatibility, the SLG cable must be routed via an S7-300 shield connecting element (see previous diagram). The cable shield should be exposed as shown in the diagram below. 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 4-35 84 Exposure of the cable shield MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.7 Cable and connector assignment 4.7 Cable and connector assignment The casing of the standard data cable for the SLG used with MOBY is polyurethane (PUR according to VDE 0250). This provides excellent protection to the cable against oils, acids, alkalies and hydraulic fluids. 4.7.1 Cable configuration The cable between the PC and SLG must have three cores and a shield. The data can be transferred largely independently of the wire diameter over distances of up to 30 m (depending on the baudrate). Standard cable recommended by Siemens: LiYC11Y Grounding of the SLG cable It is generally recommended that the shield is connected to a ground rail over a large surface area. Trailing cable The SLG can also be connected over a cable suitable for trailing. Recommended cable type: HPM Paartronic 3340-C-PUR 3 2 0.25. Power supply for SLG D1x Power is supplied to the SLG D1x over a 4-pin M12 connector. It is essential to consider the voltage drop over the supply cable. The permissible length of the power supply cable depends on the power consumption of the SLG and the resistance of the connecting cable. Table 4- 27 Power supply for SLG D1x SLG D10/SLG D10S Rated value '&9 Permitted range '&9s UL only (measured at the SLG connector) Current consumption Starting current Operation at 24 V DC MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 SLG D11/SLG D11S SLG D12/SLG D12S 2.8 A/50 ms 0.9 A (4 W setting) 1.4 A (10 W setting) '&9 '&99 '&9s8/RQO\ (measured at the SLG connector) 0,6 A 0,15 A 85 Planning the MOBY D system 4.7 Cable and connector assignment 4.7.2 Connector pin assignment for SLG D1x (RS232) Serial port Pin Pin, casing side (9-pin Sub-D connector with screw locking) Name SLG D10/D11/D12 (RS 232) 1 Cable shield 2 TxD Transmit 3 RxD Receive 4 Not assigned 5 Ground (0 V) 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 8 Cable shield 9 Not assigned Housing Not assigned Note When metal Sub D casings are used on the SLG side, the casing must be connected to the cable shield. Table 4- 28 Ordering data for mating connector for SLG D1x Order No. IP 65 mating connector for SLG D1x 9-pin Sub-D connector, female 86 6GT2490-1AA00 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.7 Cable and connector assignment Power supply Pin Pin, casing side 4-pin M12 Name SLG D1x 1 Ground (0 V) 2 + 24 V 3 + 24 V 4 Ground (0 V) 3ODQYLHZ Table 4- 29 Ordering data for mating connector for power supply Order No. Mating connector for power supply for SLG D1x 6GT2390-1AB00 4-pin M12 connector, female MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 87 Planning the MOBY D system 4.7 Cable and connector assignment 4.7.3 Connector pin assignment for D1xS (RS422) Serial port Pin Pin, casing side (9-pin Sub-D connector with screw locking) Name SLG D1xS (RS 422) 1 Cable shield 2 + Receive 3 + Transmit 4 Not assigned 5 - Transmit 6 - Receive 7 Ground (0 V) 8 Cable shield 9 Not assigned Housing Not assigned Note When metal Sub D casings are used on the SLG side, the casing must be connected to the cable shield. Table 4- 30 Ordering data for mating connector for SLG D1xS Order No. IP 65 mating connector for SLG D1x 9-pin Sub-D connector, female 88 6GT2490-1AA00 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.7 Cable and connector assignment Power supply Pin Pin, casing side 4-pin M12 Name SLG D1xS 1 Ground (0 V) 2 + 24 V 3 + 24 V 4 Ground (0 V) 3ODQYLHZ Table 4- 31 Ordering data for mating connector for power supply Order No. Mating connector for power supply for SLG D1x 6GT2390-1AB00 4-pin M12 connector, female MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 89 Planning the MOBY D system 4.7 Cable and connector assignment 4.7.4 Connecting cable 24 V plug-in cable for SLG D1x/D1xS wide-range power supply unit 6GT2491-1HH50 6/*VLGH 0IHPDOH 0FRQQHFWRU PDOHIRUSRZHU VXSSO\XQLWVLGH P Figure 4-36 24 V DC plug-in cable for SLG D1x/D1xS and wide-range power supply unit (6GT2 4940AA00) Cable for SLG D1x PC/RS 232 6GT2691-0BH50 6GT2691-0BN20 3&VLGH 6/*VLGH SLQVXE' IHPDOHVFUHZ ORFNLQJ SLQVXE' IHPDOHVFUHZ ORFNLQJ 5[' 7[' 7[' 5[' 9 9 &DVLQJ VKLHOG P Figure 4-37 90 Connecting cable RS 232 PC SLG D1x MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.7 Cable and connector assignment Connecting cable SLG D1xS ASM 452/473 6GT2491-1CH20 6GT2491-1CH50 6GT2491-1CN20 $60VLGH 6/*VLGH ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 7ZRSLQ0 FLUFXODUFRQQHFWRUV ; ZKLWH %URZQ JUHHQ \HOORZ *UD\ SLQVXE' IHPDOHVFUHZ ORFNLQJ VKLHOG ; PPP &DXWLRQ :KHQPHWDO6XE'FDVLQJVDUHXVHGRQWKH6/*VLGHWKHFDVLQJPXVWEH FRQQHFWHGWRWKHFDEOHVKLHOG Figure 4-38 Connecting cable SLG D1xS ASM 452/473 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 91 Planning the MOBY D system 4.7 Cable and connector assignment Connecting cable SLG D1xS ASM 475 6GT2491-0EH50 6GT2491-0EN20 6GT2491-0EN50 $60VLGH 6/*VLGH &DEOHZLWKZLUHHQGIHUUXOHV ZKLWH %URZQ JUHHQ \HOORZ *UD\ SLQVXE' IHPDOHVFUHZ ORFNLQJ VKLHOG &DEOHVKLHOGH[SRVHG PPP &DXWLRQ :KHQPHWDO6XE'FDVLQJVDUHXVHGRQWKH6/*VLGHWKHFDVLQJPXVWEH FRQQHFWHGWRWKHFDEOHVKLHOG Figure 4-39 Connecting cable SLG D1xS ASM 475 Connecting cable SLG D1xS ASM 456 / RF170C / RF180C 6GT2691-0FH20 $60VLGH 6/*VLGH 0FRQQHFWRU PDOH SLQVXE' IHPDOHVFUHZ ORFNLQJ O Figure 4-40 92 Connecting cable SLG D1xS ASM 456 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Planning the MOBY D system 4.7 Cable and connector assignment Extension cable SLG D1xS ASM 456 /RF170C / RF180C 6GT2891-0F... $60VLGH &RXSOLQJVLGH 0FRQQHFWRU PDOH 0FRQQHFWRU VRFNHW IRU FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH $60 *7)+ O Figure 4-41 Extension cable SLG D1xS ASM 456 Antenna connecting cable SLG D10 / SLG D11 / SLG D10S / SLG D11S ANT Dx 6GT2691-0CH33 6GT2691-0CN10 Figure 4-42 ANT antenna connecting cable SLG D10 / SLG D11 / SLG D10S / SLG D11S ANT Dx (3.3 m/10.5 m) Antenna extension cable 6GT2691-0DH72 Figure 4-43 Antenna extension cable (7.2 m) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 93 Planning the MOBY D system 4.7 Cable and connector assignment 94 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.1 5 Introduction Application area MOBY identification systems support automatic, fast and reliable identification. The important data accompany the product throughout the complete logistics and transport process. When fitted to the item to be identified, data can be stored on the MDS contact-free and either updated or read out contact-free at any point in the material flow process. Different types of MDS can be selected to suit the specific application. Rugged transponder construction supports use under harsh industrial conditions at high temperatures and makes the MDS resistant to many chemical substances. Design and function The main components of the mobile data storage unit (MDS) are logic, antenna and EEPROM. If an MDS moves into the transmission field of the SLG (write/read device), the necessary power for all circuit components is generated and monitored by means of the energy supply unit. The pulse-coded information is prepared in such a way that it can be processed further as pure digital signals. The control unit handles the data and the check routines. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 95 Mobile data storage units 5.1 Introduction Overview Table 5- 1 MDS overview table MDS Memory size Temperature range (in operation) Dimensions (L x W x H in mm) Degree of protecti on MDS D100 EEPROM 128 bytes gross 112 bytes net -25 to +80 C 85 x 54 x 0.8 IP68 MDS D124 EEPROM 128 bytes gross 112 bytes net -25 to +125 C (180 C for 1000 h) O 27 x 4 IP68/X 9K MDS D139 EEPROM 128 bytes gross 112 bytes net -25 to +140 C (220 C for 2000 h) O 85 x 15 IP68/X 9K MDS D160 EEPROM 128 bytes gross 112 bytes net -25 to +85 C (125 C for 1000 h) O 16 x 3 IP68/X 9K MDS D165 EEPROM 128 bytes gross 112 bytes net -25 to +85 C 85 x 54 x 0.3 IP65 MDS D200 EEPROM 256 bytes gross 256 bytes net -20 to +60 C 85 x 54 x 0.6 IP67 MDS D261 EEPROM 256 bytes gross 256 bytes net -25 to +85 C 55 x 55 x 0.3 IP65 MDS D324 EEPROM 1024 bytes gross 992 bytes net -25 to +125 C O 27 x 4 IP67 MDS D424 EEPROM 2048 bytes gross 2000 bytes net -25 to +85 C O 27 x 4 IP67 MDS D428 EEPROM 2048 bytes gross 2000 bytes net -25 to +85 C O 27 x 20 SW 22, M8 thread IP68/X 9K MDS D460 EEPROM 2048 bytes gross 2000 bytes net -25 to +85 C O 16 x 3 IP67/X 9K Definition of IP67: Protection against the ingress of dust (dustproof) Complete touch protection Protection against water under specified pressure and for specified time Definition of IP68: Protection against the ingress of dust (dustproof) Complete touch protection The MDS can be submerged in water for long periods; the conditions must be clarified with the manufacturer. 96 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.1 Introduction Memory allocation of the MDS Memory division for PC applications of ISO 15693 transponders The MDS D1xx are based on the NXP I-Code SL2 and have a 128-byte EEPROM memory that is subdivided into 32 blocks. A block on the transponder is the smallest addressable memory area and is subdivided into areas of 4 bytes in length for access. 112 bytes (= 28 blocks) can be used by the user. The MDS D2xx are based on the Texas HF-I and have a 256-byte EEPROM memory that is subdivided into 64 blocks. A block on the transponder is the smallest addressable memory area and is subdivided into areas of 4 bytes in length for access. All 256 bytes (= 64 blocks) can be used by the user. The MDS D3xx are based on the Infineon SRF55V10P and have a 1024-byte EEPROM memory that is subdivided into 256 blocks. A block on the transponder is the smallest addressable memory area and is subdivided into areas of 4 bytes in length for access. 992 bytes (= 248 blocks) can be used by the user. The MDS D4xx are based on the Fujitsu MB89R118B and have a 2048-byte FRAM memory that is subdivided into 256 blocks. A block on the transponder is the smallest addressable memory area and is subdivided into areas of 8 bytes in length for access. 2000 bytes (= 250 blocks) can be used by the user. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 97 Mobile data storage units 5.2 Memory configuration of the ISO tags 5.2 Memory configuration of the ISO tags ))) 8,' UHDGRQO\ E\WHV ))) &) 0'6' 0'6' 0'6' )XMLWVX0%5 E\WH)5$0 E\WHEORFNVL]H 0'6' ,QILQHRQP\G E\WH((3520 E\WHEORFNVL]H 0'6' 0'6' 7DJLW+), ') 8VHUDUHD UHDGZULWH ((3520 )) E\WH((3520 E\WHEORFNVL]H 0'6' 0'6' 0'6' 0'6' 0'6' Figure 5-1 ,&2'(6/, E\WH((3520 E\WHEORFNVL]H ) Memory configuration Memory areas Depending on the manufacturer of the transponder chip, the memory configuration of an ISO tag consists of EEPROM memory of varying sizes. Except for transponders that are equipped with a Fuijtsu 2k FRAM. These are equipped with one FRAM. The typical sizes are 112 bytes, 256 bytes, 992 bytes or 2000 bytes. Each ISO transponder chip features an 8-byte unique serial number (UID, read only). This UID is transferred as an 8 byte value through a read command to address FFF0 with a length of 8. 98 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.3 MDS D100 5.3 MDS D100 5.3.1 Characteristics MDS D100 Characteristics Field of application From simple identification such as electronic barcode replacement/supplementation, through warehouse and distribution logistics, right up to product identification. Memory EEPROM 128 bytes gross 112 bytes net capacity 5.3.2 Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33). Mounting on metal Not possible; recommended distance from metal 20 mm ISO standard ISO 15693 Ordering data Table 5- 2 Ordering data for MDS D100 Order number MDS D100 Table 5- 3 5.3.3 6GT2600-0AD10 Ordering data for MDS D100 accessory MDS D100 accessory Order number Spacers 6GT2190-0AA00 Fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00 Fixing pocket (cannot be mounted directly on metal) 6GT2390-0AA00 Metal-free area Direct mounting of the MDS D100 on metal is not allowed. A distance of 20 mm is recommended. This can be achieved using the spacer 6GT2190-0AA00 in combination with the fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 99 Mobile data storage units 5.3 MDS D100 Mounting on metal K h 20 mm Data memory Metal Non-metal Figure 5-2 Mounting of the MDS D100 on metal with spacer Flush-mounting D D K a 20 mm h 20 mm Data memory Metal Non-metal Figure 5-3 100 Flush-mounting of MDS D100 in metal with spacer MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.3 MDS D100 Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. See also Dimension drawing (Page 105) 5.3.4 Mounting options Fixing pocket for MDS D100 The fixing pocket is secured on a non-metallic surface with M4 countersunk head screws in the holes provided. s s s Figure 5-4 s s Fixing pocket 6GT2390-0AA00 for MDS D100 Note The fixing pocket shown here with Order No.: 6GT2 390-0AA00 is not suitable for use with the spacer (6GT2 190-0AA00). Note When mounting the MDS D100 on metal, it is also possible to use the 6GT2 190-0AB00 fixing pocket, but only in combination with the 6GT2 190-0AA00 spacer. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 101 Mobile data storage units 5.3 MDS D100 Fixing pocket with spacer for MDS D100 'LPHQVLRQVNHWFK 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW*7$% 6SDFHUV*7$$ /XJV +ROGLQJNQREV +ROGLQJEUDFNHW 0DWHULDO3$ 7KHVSDFHUFDQEHPRXQWHGGLUHFWO\RQPHWDO7RJHWKHUZLWKWKH PRXQWLQJEUDFNHWWKLVUHVXOWVLQDGLVWDQFHRIPPEHWZHHQWUDQVSRQGHUDQGPHWDO 0RXQWLQJ :LWKRUVFUHZV 0 :LWKUXEEHUSDGVRQWKHKROGLQJEUDFNHWV HJRQPHVKER[HV :LWKFDEOHWLHVRQWKHKROGLQJEUDFNHWV HJRQPHVKER[HV 7UDQVSRQGHUZLWKPRXQWLQJEUDFNHW 7UDQVSRQGHUZLWKPRXQWLQJEUDFNHWDQG VSDFHU DVVHPEOHG 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW 7KHWUDQVSRQGHU LVSXVKHG LQWRWKHPRXQWLQJ EUDFNHW /RFNLQJ WDNHVSODFHZLWK KROGLQJNQREVLQ WKHPRXQWLQJ EUDFNHWZ 7KHWDEVRIWKHPRXQWLQJEUDFNHWDUHVHFXUHGWRD QRQPHWDOEDVH7KLVFDQEHGRQH DVIROORZV 6FUHZVLQWKHKROHVSURYLGHG 5LYHWVLQWKHKROHVSURYLGHG 1DLOVWKURXJKWKHKROHV 6WDSOHVWKURXJKWKHSODVWLFRIWKHWDEV ,QVHUWLRQLQWKHVSDFHU 7KHWDEVFDQDOVREHEHQWE\ r Figure 5-5 102 6SDFHUV 6,(0(16 'DWDPHPRU\ 5HDVVHPEO\LQVWUXFWLRQV 6OLGHWUDQVSRQGHULQWRWKHPRXQWLQJ EUDFNHW7KHWDEVDUHWKHQEHQWE\r DQGLQVHUWHGLQWRWKHVSDFHU3RVLWLRQ WKHPRXQWLQJEUDFNHW VRWKDWLWFRYHUV WKHWUDQVSRQGHU VHH)LJXUH ,WLV DXWRPDWLFDOO\ORFNHGLQWRSODFH Dimensions of the spacer and fixing pocket 6GT2190-0AB00 for MDS 100 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.3 MDS D100 Mounting option using drill holes on the MDS You can also secure the MDS D100 with screws. You must drill the marked holes for this purpose (see Dimension drawing (Page 105)). Drill hole/setting max. 3.5 mm, Screw according to DIN 4017: M3, head diameter max. 6 mm MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 103 Mobile data storage units 5.3 MDS D100 5.3.5 Technical data Table 5- 4 Technical data for MDS D100 Memory size 128 bytes Memory configuration Serial number Configuration memory Application memory Storage technology EEPROM Memory organization EEPROM 128 bytes gross 8 bytes (fixed code) 8 bytes 112 bytes 112 bytes net capacity When using the OPT area, 16 bytes of it must be subtracted in 4 byte blocks 104 Protocol according to ISO 15693 Data retention (at +40 C) 10 years MTBF (at +40 C) 2 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Write cycles, typical 1 000 000 Write cycles, min. 100 000 Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter . Distance from metal min. 20 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data) Multitag capability Yes Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery) Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP68 Vibration ISO 10373/ISO 7810 Torsion and bending load ISO 10373/ISO 7816-1 Mechanical design Color Material Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm Laminated plastic card, printable on both sides White/petrol PC 85.6 (0.2) x 54 (0.2) x 0.9 (0.05) Fixing Adhesive, fixing pocket Ambient temperature During operation Transport and storage Weight, approx. 5g -25 C to +80 C -25 C to +80 C MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.3 MDS D100 5.3.6 Dimension drawing s s 5 s Dimensions in mm 1) Dimensions for mounting holes Figure 5-6 MDS D100 dimension drawing MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 105 Mobile data storage units 5.4 MDS D124 5.4 MDS D124 5.4.1 Characteristics MDS D124 Characteristics Field of application Application areas in factory automation (e.g. small paintshops to 180C) Memory EEPROM 128 bytes gross Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33). Mounting on metal Not possible: 112 bytes net capacity Recommended distance from metal 25 mm Standard 5.4.2 ISO 15693 Ordering data Table 5- 5 Ordering data for MDS D124 Order number MDS D124 5.4.3 6GT2600-0AC10 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal 'DWDPHPRU\ K 1RQPHWDO 0HWDO h 25 mm Figure 5-7 106 Mounting of the MDS D124 on metal with spacer MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.4 MDS D124 Flush-mounting 'DWDPHPRU\ 1RQPHWDO K 0HWDO D h 25 mm a 25 mm Figure 5-8 Flush-mounting of MDS D124 in metal with spacer Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no tangible impact on the range. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 107 Mobile data storage units 5.4 MDS D124 5.4.4 Technical specifications Table 5- 6 Technical data for MDS D124 Memory size 128 bytes Memory configuration Serial number Configuration memory Application memory 8 bytes (fixed code) 8 bytes 112 bytes Storage technology EEPROM Memory organization EEPROM 128 bytes gross 112 bytes net capacity When using the OPT area, 16 bytes of it must be subtracted in 4 byte blocks Protocol according to ISO 15693 Data retention (at +40 C) 10 years MTBF (at +40 C) 1.5 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Write cycles at +40 C, typical 1 000 000 Write cycles, min. 100 000 Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33). Distance from metal min. 25 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data) Multitag capability Yes Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery) Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP68 1) IPx9K 2) 108 Shock according to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3 Total shock response spectrum, Type II 100 g 3) Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3 20 g 3) Torsion and bending load Not permissible Enclosure Dimensions (D x H) in mm Color Material Fixing Adhesive, M3 screw Tightening torque at +20 C 1 Nm (at high temperatures, the expansion coefficients of the materials used must be taken into account) 27(0.2) x 4(0.2) Black Plastic PPS, silicone-free MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.4 MDS D124 Ambient temperature During operation Transport and storage 2) 3) 4) 5.4.5 Permanent +125 C to +140 C 20% reduction in the limit distance +180 C 4) Tested up to 5000 hours or 3000 cycles -40 C to +125 C Weight, approx. 1) -25 C to +125 C 5g 2 hours, 2 m, +20 C steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. Note that no processing is possible at temperatures of +140 C or higher. Dimension drawing s s Dimensions in mm Figure 5-9 Dimension drawing of MDS D124 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 109 Mobile data storage units 5.5 MDS D139 5.5 MDS D139 5.5.1 Characteristics MDS D139 Characteristics Field of application Applications in production logistics and in assembly lines subject to high temperatures (up to +220 C) Typical application areas: Paintshops and their preparatory treatments) Primer coat, electrolytic dip area, cataphoresis with the associated drying furnaces Top coat area with drying furnaces Washing areas at temperatures > 85 C Other applications with higher temperatures Memory EEPROM 128 bytes gross 112-byte user memory 5.5.2 Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33). Mounting on metal With spacer; recommended distance from metal 30 mm ISO standard ISO 15693 High degree of protection IP68, IPx9K Material Plastic PPS; silicone-free Ordering data Table 5- 7 Ordering data for MDS D139 Order number MDS D139 Table 5- 8 6GT2600-0AA10 Ordering data for MDS D139 accessory MDS D139 accessory Order number Spacers 6GT2690-0AA00 Diameter x height: 85 mm x 30 mm 110 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.5 MDS D139 5.5.3 Mounting on metal CAUTION Damage to the MDS due to improper mounting For mounting with the spacer (6GT2690-0AA00), use a stainless steel M5 screw to avoid damaging the MDS in high temperatures (expansion coefficients). In higher temperatures (> +80 C), observe the expansion coefficients of all materials in order to prevent damage to the MDS due to fastening. 0RXQWLQJRQPHWDO 'DWDVWRUDJH XQLW 0HWDO 6SDFHU KPP PP )OXVKPRXQWLQJRIWKH0'6LQPHWDOLVQRWSHUPLWWHG Figure 5-10 Metal-free area for MDS D139 5HWDLQLQJEROW 0'6' 6SDFHU Figure 5-11 MDS D139: Mounting recommended with spacer MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 111 Mobile data storage units 5.5 MDS D139 Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M5). This has no tangible impact on the range. It is recommended that a test is performed in critical applications. 112 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.5 MDS D139 5.5.4 Technical specifications Table 5- 9 Technical data for MDS D139 Memory size 128 bytes Memory configuration Serial number Configuration memory Application memory Storage technology EEPROM Memory organization See MOBY D System Manual, 8 bytes (fixed code) 8 bytes 112 bytes Chapter 5.1, "Mobile Data Storage Units, Introduction", section "Memory Allocation" Data retention 10 years MTBF 2 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Write cycles at +40 C minimum typical Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33). Distance from metal min. 30 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data) Multitag capability Yes Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery) Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP68 1) 100 000 1.000.000 IPx9K 2) Shock according to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3 Total shock response spectrum, Type II 50 g Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3 20 g Torsion and bending load Not permissible Enclosure dimensions Dimensions (D x H) in mm Color Material Fixing 3 x M5 screw 1) Tightening torque 1,5 Nm 4) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 85 (0.5) x 15 (-1.0) Black Plastic PPS, silicone-free 113 Mobile data storage units 5.5 MDS D139 Ambient temperature During operation Transport and storage Weight 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 5.5.5 -25 C to +100 C Permanent +120 C to +140 C 20% reduction in the limit distance +200 C 5) Tested up to 5000 hours or 3000 cycles +220 C Tested up to 2000 hours or 1500 cycles -40 C to +100 C Approx. 50 g 2 hours, 2 m, +20 C steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C For mounting with the spacer (6GT2690-0AA00), use a stainless steel M5 screw to avoid damaging the MDS in high temperatures (expansion coefficient). In higher temperatures (> +80 C), observe the expansion coefficient of all materials in order to prevent damage to the MDS due to fastening. Note that no processing is possible at temperatures of +140 C or higher. Use of the MDS D139 in potentially explosive environments The MDS D139 mobile data memory is classed as a piece of simple, electrical equipment and can be operated in Protection Zone 2, Device Group II, Category 3G. The following requirements of the Directive 94/9/EC are fulfilled: EN 60079-0 :2006 EN 60079-15 : 2005 Identification II 3 G Ex nA II T2 KEMA 09 ATEX 0133 X Ta: -25 ... +220C WARNING Gefahr durch elektrostatische Entladungen Potential electrostatic charging hazard Danger potentiel de charges electrostatiques 114 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.5 MDS D139 NOTICE Installations- und Betriebsbedingungen fur den Ex-Schutzbereich: a) Der Einsatz des Gerates in der Nahe von stark ladungserzeugenden Prozessen ist untersagt. b) Das Gerat ist mechanisch geschutzt zu montieren. c) Die Montage muss auf einem geerdeten, leitenden Untergrund erfolgen. d) Die Reinigung darf nur mit feuchtem Tuch erfolgen. Installation and operating conditions for hazardous areas: a) Use of the equipment in the vicinity of processes generating high charges is not allowed. b) The equipment must be mechanically protected when installed. c) Installation must be performed on a grounded and conductive mounting surface. d) Cleaning only with a wet cloth. Conditions d'installation et de mise en oeuvre pour la zone de protection Ex : a) L'utilisation de l'appareil pres de processus generant de fortes charges est interdite. b) L'appareil doit etre monte de maniere a etre protege mecaniquement. c) Le montage doit etre effectue sur un socle conducteur mis a la terre. d) Nettoyage uniquement avec un chiffon humide. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 115 Mobile data storage units 5.5 MDS D139 s s s s Dimensional drawing s 5.5.6 s Dimensions in mm Figure 5-12 5.5.7 Dimensional drawing MDS D139 Cleaning the mobile data memory NOTICE Do not clean the transponder with mechanical tools, sand-blasting or pressure hose. These cleaning methods result in damage to the transponder. Clean the transponder only with the chemical cleansing agents listed in Chapter . 116 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.6 MDS D160 5.6 MDS D160 5.6.1 Characteristics MDS D160 Characteristics Field of application Typical applications are, for example: Rented work clothing Hotel laundry Surgical textiles Hospital clothing Dirt collection mats Clothing for nursing homes/hostels Memory EEPROM 128 bytes gross Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33). 112 bytes net capacity Mounting on metal Not possible: Recommended distance from metal 25 mm 5.6.2 High resistance Thanks to its rugged packaging, the MDS D160 is a transponder that can be used under extreme environmental conditions. It is washable, heat-resistant and resistant to all chemicals generally used in the laundry process. ISO standard ISO 15693 Ordering data Table 5- 10 Ordering data for MDS D160 Order number MDS D160 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 6GT2600-0AB10 117 Mobile data storage units 5.6 MDS D160 5.6.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal 'DWDPHPRU\ K 0HWDO 1RQPHWDO h 25 mm Figure 5-13 Mounting of the MDS D160 on metal with spacer Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. In critical applications, it is recommended that a test is performed. Flush-mounting Flush-mounting of the MDS D160 in metal is not permitted! 118 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.6 MDS D160 5.6.4 Technical specifications Memory size 128 bytes Memory configuration Serial number Configuration memory Application memory Storage technology EEPROM Memory organization 8 bytes (fixed code) 8 bytes 112 bytes EEPROM 128 bytes gross 112 bytes net capacity When using the OPT area, 16 bytes of it must be subtracted in 4 byte blocks Protocol According to ISO 15693 Data retention (at +55 C) 10 years MTBF (at +40 C) 2 x 106 hours Bulk detection/multitag capability Yes Data retention 10 years Read cycles Unlimited Write cycles at + 40 C, typical 1 000 000 Write cycles, min. 100 000 Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33) Distance from metal Min. 25 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data) Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery) Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP68 (24 hours, 2 m, +20 C) Shock, tested in accordance with IEC 68-2-27 40 g (18 ms; 6 axes; 2000 repeats/h) Vibration, tested in accordance with IEC 68-2-6 10 g (10 to 2000 Hz; 3 axes; 2.5 h) Torsion and bending load Not permissible Mechanical strength Isostatic pressure Axial pressure Radial pressure 300 bar for 5 min 1000 N for 10 s 1000 N for 10 s Resistance to chemicals All chemicals normally used in the washing process MDS lifespan At least 100 wash cycles Mechanical design Color Material Dimensions (D x H) in mm MDS fixing Patch, sew, glue MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 White PPS, pressed, impact-resistant plastic 16(0.2) x 3,0(0.2) 119 Mobile data storage units 5.6 MDS D160 Ambient temperature During operation Transport and storage Weight, approx. 1) -25 C to +85 C Permanent +125 C for 1000 hours (20% reduction in the limit distance) +175 C 1) 500 x for 10 minutes +220 C 1 x for 30 seconds 1) -25 C to +100 C 1g No processing possible from +140 C upwards Note Regeneration time for the MDS D160 between wash cycles must be at least 24 hours It is recommended that a test is performed in critical applications. 5.6.5 Dimension drawing s s Dimensions in mm Figure 5-14 120 Dimension drawing of MDS D160 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.7 MDS D165 5.7 MDS D165 5.7.1 Features MDS D165 (special version) Features Application area The design of the transponder (self-adhesive label) permits a variety of designs, guaranteeing optimum dimensioning for the widest variety of applications. From simple identification such as electronic barcode replacement/supplementation, through warehouse and distribution logistics, right up to product identification. 5.7.2 Memory 112-byte user memory Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33). ISO standard 15693 with I-Code SLI technology. Ordering data Table 5- 11 Ordering data for MDS D165 Order No. MDS D165 (special version ISO-CARD) 6GT2600-1AB00-0AX0 Type of delivery Minimum order quantity: 1250 units (5 rolls with 250 units each) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 121 Mobile data storage units 5.7 MDS D165 5.7.3 Technical data Memory configuration Serial number (UID) Configuration memory AFI/DSFID Application memory Storage technology EEPROM Memory organization 4 bytes, block by block Protocol according to ISO 15693 Data transmission rate reading writing Multitag capability Yes Data retention 10 years Read cycles Unlimited Write cycles, min. 100 000 Recommended distance to metal 25 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data) Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery) Typical read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33) Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 Dimensions L x W (in mm) Height 86 x 54 approx. 0.3 mm Material Top Inlay Antenna Bottom PET plastic (label material) PET plastic (carrier material) Aluminum Double-sided transfer adhesive on silicon paper Color White Mounting Single-sided adhesive (self-adhesive label) Imprinting Yes, (heat transfer method) 122 Ambient temperature during operation Storage temperature 8 bytes (fixed code) 6 bytes 2 bytes 112 bytes approx. 3.5 ms/byte approx. 9.5 ms/byte -25 C to +85 C +20 C to +30 C (the storage period is 2 years, determined by durability of the adhesive) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.7 MDS D165 5.7.4 Dimension drawing W Dimensions in mm Figure 5-15 Dimension drawing of MDS D165 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 123 Mobile data storage units 5.8 MDS D200 5.8 MDS D200 5.8.1 Features MDS D200 (special version) Features Application area 5.8.2 From simple identification such as electronic barcode replacement/supplementation, through warehouse and distribution logistics, right up to product identification. Memory 256-byte user memory Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33). Mounting on metal Recommended distance from metal 30 mm ISO standard 15693 with Tag-it HFI technology Ordering data Table 5- 12 Ordering data for MDS D200 Order No. MDS D200 (special version ISO-CARD) 124 6GT2600-1AD00-0AX0 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.8 MDS D200 5.8.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal K h 20 mm Data memory Metal Non-metal Figure 5-16 Mounting of the MDS D200 on metal with spacer MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 125 Mobile data storage units 5.8 MDS D200 Flush-mounting D D K a 20 mm h 20 mm Data memory Metal Non-metal Figure 5-17 Flush-mounting of MDS D200 in metal with spacer Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. 126 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.8 MDS D200 5.8.4 Technical data Memory configuration Serial number Application memory Storage technology EEPROM Memory organization 4 bytes, block by block 8 bytes (fixed code) 256 bytes Protocol according to ISO 15693 Data retention (at +25 C) 10 years MTBF (at +25 C) 2 x 105 hours Read cycles Write cycles, min. Write cycles, typical Unlimited 100 000 1 000 000 Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33) Recommended distance to metal 25 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data) Multitag capability Yes Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery) Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP67 Vibration ISO 10373/ISO 7810 Torsion and bending load ISO 10373/ISO 7816-1 Mechanical design Color Material Dimensions (L x W x H in mm) Laminated plastic card, printable on both sides White PET 85 x 54 x 0.8 Mounting Adhesive, fixing lug Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage Weight approx. 5 g MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 -20 C to +60 C -20 C to +60 C 127 Mobile data storage units 5.8 MDS D200 5.8.5 Dimension drawing 5 W Dimensions in mm Figure 5-18 128 Dimension drawing of MDS D200 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.9 MDS D261 5.9 MDS D261 5.9.1 Features MDS D261 (special version) Features Application area The design of the transponder (self-adhesive label) permits a variety of designs, guaranteeing optimum dimensioning for the widest variety of applications. From simple identification such as electronic barcode replacement/supplementation, through warehouse and distribution logistics, right up to product identification. 5.9.2 Memory 256-byte user memory Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33). ISO standard 15693 with Tag-it HFI technology. Ordering data Table 5- 13 Ordering data for MDS D261 Order No. MDS D261 6GT2600-1AA00-0AX0 Type of delivery Minimum order quantity: 1250 units (5 rolls with 250 units each) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 129 Mobile data storage units 5.9 MDS D261 5.9.3 Technical data Memory configuration Serial number AFI/DSFID Application memory Storage technology EEPROM Memory organization 4 bytes, block by block Protocol according to ISO 15693 Data transmission rate reading writing approx. 3.5 ms/byte approx. 9.5 ms/byte Multitag capability Yes Data retention 10 years Read cycles Unlimited Write cycles, min. 100 000 Recommended distance to metal 25 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data) Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery) Typical read/write distance See Chapter Field data (Page 33) Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 Dimensions L x W (in mm) Height 55 x 55 approx. 0.3 mm Material Top Inlay Antenna Bottom PET plastic (label material) PET plastic (carrier material) Aluminum Double-sided transfer adhesive on silicon paper Color White Mounting Single-sided adhesive (self-adhesive label) Imprinting Yes (heat transfer method) Ambient temperature during operation Storage temperature Type of delivery 130 8 bytes (fixed code) 2 bytes 256 bytes -25 C to +85 C +20 C to +30 C (the storage period is 2 years, determined by durability of the adhesive) Minimum order quantity 1250 units (5 rolls with 250 units each) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.9 MDS D261 5.9.4 Dimension drawing W Dimensions in mm Figure 5-19 Dimension drawing of MDS D261 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 131 Mobile data storage units 5.10 MDS D324 5.10 MDS D324 5.10.1 Characteristics MDS D324 Characteristics Field of application Production and distribution logistics and product identification Memory EEPROM 1024 bytes gross Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33). Mounting on metal Not possible: 992 bytes net capacity Recommended distance from metal 25 mm 5.10.2 High resistance Can also be used in harsh environments under extreme environmental conditions (e.g. with higher temperature load). ISO standard ISO 15693 Ordering data Table 5- 14 Ordering data MDS D324 Order number MDS D324 132 6GT2600-3AC00 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.10 MDS D324 5.10.3 Metal-free area 'DWDPHPRU\ K 0HWDO 1RQPHWDO h 25 mm Figure 5-20 Mounting of the MDS D324 on metal with spacer 'DWDPHPRU\ 0HWDO K 1RQPHWDO D h 25 mm a 25 mm Figure 5-21 Flush-mounting of MDS D324 in metal with spacer Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no tangible impact on the range. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 133 Mobile data storage units 5.10 MDS D324 5.10.4 Technical specifications Table 5- 15 Technical data MDS D324 Memory size 1024 bytes Memory configuration Serial number Configuration memory Manufacturer data 8 bytes (fixed code) 1008 bytes 8 bytes Storage technology EEPROM Memory organization 1024 EEPROM/gross 992 net capacity When using the OPT area, 16 bytes of it must be subtracted in 4 byte blocks Protocol 134 according to ISO 15693 Data retention (at +40 C) 10 years MTBF (at +40 C) 1.5 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Write cycles, typical 1 000 000 Write cycles, min. 100 000 Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Distance from metal Min. 25 mm (approx. 30% reduction of the field data) Multitag capability Yes Anti-collision speed Approx. 20 transponders/s simultaneously identifiable Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery) Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP67 Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3 total shock response spectrum, type II 100 g Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3 20 g Torsion and bending load Not permissible Enclosure Dimensions (D x H) in mm Color Material Fixing Adhesive, M3 screw Tightening torque at +20 C 1 Nm (at high temperatures, the expansion coefficients of the materials used must be taken into account) 27(-0,2) x 4(0.2) Black Epoxy casting resin MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.10 MDS D324 5.10.5 Ambient temperature Operation During transportation and storage Weight, ca. 5g -25 C to +125 C -40 C to +150 C Dimension drawing s s Dimensions in mm Figure 5-22 Dimension drawing of MDS D324 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 135 Mobile data storage units 5.11 MDS D424 5.11 MDS D424 5.11.1 Characteristics MDS D424 Characteristics Field of application Production and distribution logistics as well as in assembly and production lines Memory FRAM 2048 bytes gross Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33). Mounting on metal Not possible: High resistance Can also be used in a harsh industrial environment without problem Standard Oriented according to ISO standard 15693 2000 bytes net Recommended distance from metal 25 mm 5.11.2 Ordering data Table 5- 16 Ordering data of MDS D424 Order number MDS D424 5.11.3 6GT2600-4AC00 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal 'DWDPHPRU\ K 1RQPHWDO 0HWDO h 25 mm Figure 5-23 136 Mounting of the MDS D424 on metal with spacer MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.11 MDS D424 Flush-mounting 'DWDPHPRU\ 1RQPHWDO K 0HWDO D h 25 mm a 25 mm Figure 5-24 Flush-mounting of MDS D424 in metal with spacer Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no tangible impact on the range. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 137 Mobile data storage units 5.11 MDS D424 5.11.4 Technical specifications Table 5- 17 Technical data of MDS D424 Memory size 2048 bytes Memory configuration Serial number Configuration memory Application memory Storage technology FRAM Memory organization 2048 bytes gross 8 bytes (fixed code) 40 bytes 2000 bytes 2000 bytes net Protocol ISO 15693 Data retention (at +40 C) 10 years MTBF (at +40 C) 1.5 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Write cycles (at +40 C) > 1010 Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33) Distance from metal Min. 25 mm (ca. 30% reduction of the field data) Multitag capability Yes Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery) Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP67 Shock according to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3 Total shock response spectrum, Type II 100 g 1) Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3 20 g 1) Torsion and bending load Not permissible Enclosure Color Material Dimensions (D x H) in mm Fixing M3 screw, adhesive Tightening torque at +20 C 1 Nm Ambient temperature During operation Transport and storage Weight, approx. 5g 1) 138 Black Epoxy casting resin 27(0.2) x 4(0.2) -25 C to +85 C -40 C to +100 C The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.11 MDS D424 5.11.5 Dimension drawing s s Dimensions in mm Figure 5-25 Dimension drawing of MDS D424 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 139 Mobile data storage units 5.12 MDS D428 5.12 MDS D428 5.12.1 Characteristics MDS D428 Characteristics Field of application Compact and rugged ISO transponder; suitable for screw mounting Use in assembly and production lines in the powertrain sector Memory FRAM 2048 bytes gross 2000 bytes net Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33). Mounting on metal Yes High resistance Rugged packaging of the MDS D428; can therefore also be used under extreme environmental conditions without problem Standard Oriented according to ISO-15693 5.12.2 Ordering data Table 5- 18 Ordering data of MDS D428 Order number MDS D428 140 6GT2600-4AK00 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.12 MDS D428 5.12.3 Application example of MDS D428 0'6' 0RWRUEORFN 6/* &R 0DLQILHOG QY H\ R UG LUH F WL RQ Figure 5-26 Application example Table 5- 19 Field data MDS D428 - MOBY D-SLG SLG D10/D10S ANT D5 SLG D11/D11S ANT D5 SLG D12/D12S Operating distance (Sa) 0...120 0...70 0...40 Limit distance (Sg) 160 100 60 Transmission window (Lx/Ly) 300 280 100 / 60 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS 800 800 300 All values are in mm MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 141 Mobile data storage units 5.12 MDS D428 5.12.4 Technical specifications Table 5- 20 Technical data of MDS D428 Memory size 2048 bytes Memory configuration Serial number Configuration memory Application memory Storage technology FRAM Memory organization 2048 bytes gross 8 bytes (fixed code) 40 bytes 2000 bytes 2000 bytes net Protocol ISO 15693 Data retention (at +40 C) 10 years Bulk detection/multitag capability Yes Read cycles Unlimited Write cycles at +40 C, typical > 1010 Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33) Distance from metal Can be mounted on metal Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery) Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP68 1) IPx9K 2) Shock, tested in accordance with IEC 68-2-27 50 g 3) Vibration, tested in accordance with IEC 68-2-6 20 g 3) Torsion and bending load Not permissible Enclosure Color Material Dimensions (D x H) in mm MDS fixing Black Plastic PA 6.6 GF; thread: Stainless steel 18(1) x 20(1) (without thread), thread M8 Screws, tightening torque (at room temperature) 1 Nm Ambient temperature During operation Transport and storage Weight, approx. 35 g 1) 2) 3) -25 C to +85 C -40 C to +125 C 2 hours, 2 m, +20 C steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. Note It is recommended that a test is performed in critical applications. 142 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.12 MDS D428 Dimension drawing s 5.12.5 SIEMENS *7$. 02%<' 0'6' s 5 s r 0 Dimensions in mm Figure 5-27 Dimension drawing of MDS D428 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 143 Mobile data storage units 5.13 MDS D460 5.13 MDS D460 5.13.1 Characteristics MDS D460 Characteristics Field of application Identification in small assembly lines Memory FRAM 2048 bytes gross 2000 bytes net Read/write range See Chapter Field data (Page 33). Mounting on metal Not possible: High resistance Can also be used in a harsh industrial environment Standard Oriented according to ISO standard 15693 Recommended distance from metal 25 mm 5.13.2 Ordering data Table 5- 21 Ordering data of MDS D460 Order number MDS D460 144 6GT2600-4AB00 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.13 MDS D460 5.13.3 Mounting on metal Mounting on metal 'DWDPHPRU\ K 0HWDO 1RQPHWDO h 25 mm Figure 5-28 Mounting of the MDS D460 on metal with spacer Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. In critical applications, it is recommended that a test is performed. Flush-mounting Flush-mounting of the MDS D460 in metal is not permitted! MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 145 Mobile data storage units 5.13 MDS D460 5.13.4 Technical specifications Memory size 2048 bytes Memory configuration Serial number Configuration memory Application memory Storage technology FRAM Memory organization 8 bytes (fixed code) 40 bytes 2000 bytes 2048 bytes gross 2000 bytes net Protocol ISO 15693 Data retention (at +40 C) 10 years MTBF (at +40 C) 2 x 106 hours Bulk detection/multitag capability Yes Read cycles Unlimited Write cycles (at +40 C, typical) > 1010 Read/write distance (Sg) See Chapter Field data (Page 33) Distance from metal Min. 15 mm (ca. 20% reduction of the field data) Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery) Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP67 IPx9K 1) Shock, tested in accordance with IEC 68-2-27 50 g 2) Vibration, tested in accordance with IEC 68-2-6 20 g 2) Torsion and bending load Not permissible Enclosure Color Material Dimensions (D x H) in mm MDS fixing Adhesion, spacer Ambient temperature During operation Transport and storage Weight, approx. 3g 1) 2) 146 Black Epoxy casting resin 16(0.2) x 3,0(0.2) -25 C to +85 C permanent -40 C to +100 C steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be applied continuously. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Mobile data storage units 5.13 MDS D460 5.13.5 Dimension drawing s s Dimensions in mm Figure 5-29 Dimension drawing of MDS D460 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 147 Mobile data storage units 5.13 MDS D460 148 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.1 6 Overview of SLG with RS 232 serial interface 3&LQWHUIDFH 56 0':$3, 6\VWHPLQWHUQDO56LQWHUIDFH 6/*' $17' Figure 6-1 6/*' $17' $17' 6/*' $17' Write/read devices with RS232 interface Application area The SLG with the serial RS 232 interface provides the communications interface between almost any higher-level computer systems, PCs and the mobile data storage unit (MDS). MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 149 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.1 Overview of SLG with RS 232 serial interface The following variants are available in accordance with customer requirements: SLG D10 with - ANT D5 - ANT D6 - ANT D10 SLG D11 with - ANT D2 - ANT D5 SLG D12 with integral antenna The rugged housing and high degree of protection (IP65) permit use even under the toughest industrial conditions. Design and function The SLG is connected over a serial interface (RS 232) of the PC that supports communication with PCs or non-Siemens PLCs. Commands and the data to be written or read must be converted through an appropriate modulator/demodulator circuit. The transmittable quantity of information between SLG and MDS depends on: The speed at which the MDS moves through the transmission window (determined by the antenna) of the SLG The length of the transmission window Use of the C++ library supports rapid programming of the SLG using applications executing under Windows 9x/2000, NT 4.0 and XP. Table 6- 1 Overview of SLG with RS 232 serial interface SLG with ANT Operating distance Sa (depending on MDS) Limit distance Sg (depending on MDS) Temperature range (during operation) SLG dimensions Antenna dimensions (L x W x H) (L x W x H) in mm in mm Degree of protectio n SLG D10 ANT D5 0 to 400 mm 480 mm -20 to +55 C 320 x 145 x 100 340 x 325 x 38 IP65 ANT D6 0 to 550 mm 650 mm -20 to +55 C 320 x 145 x 100 580 x 480 x 110 IP65 ANT D10 0 to 400 mm 480 mm -20 to +55 C 320 x 145 x 100 1150 x 365 x 115 IP65 ANT D2 35 to 70 mm 90 mm -20 to +70 C 160 x 80 x 40 75 x 75 x 40 IP65 SLG D11 ANT D5 SLG D12 0 to 300 mm 380 mm -20 to +55 C 160 x 80 x 40 340 x 325 x 38 IP65 0 to 120 mm 160 mm -20 to +55 C 160 x 80 x 40 - IP65 Definition of IP65: Protection against the ingress of dust (dustproof) Complete touch protection Protection against water jets 150 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.1 Overview of SLG with RS 232 serial interface Configuration SLG - MDS (over RS 232) &OLEUDU\0':$3, WKHOLEUDU\DOORZV VHYHUDOVHULDO LQWHUIDFHVWREHXVHG VLPXOWDQHRXVO\ 3& 56FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH *7%+ *7%1 :LGHUDQJHSRZHU VXSSO\XQLW IRU6,0$7,&5)V\VWHPV *7$$ &'5),'6\VWHPV 6RIWZDUH 'RFXPHQWDWLRQ 9 LQ9 LQ 6/*'$17' *7$$ $17'DQWHQQD *76 6SDFHUNLW *7$% DFFHVVRU\ 6/*' *7$% 9FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH *7++ /DEHO7UDQVSRQGHU HJ0'6' *7$$ 0'6' *7$' Figure 6-2 Configuration SLG - MDS over RS 232 Programming of SLG D10, SLG D11 and SLG D12 Communication is performed on the serial interface between the SLG and the higher-level computer system (host) by means of an asynchronous 8 bit binary protocol. The message frames are protected by means of a CRC 16. Executable on PCs equipped with Pentium 2 processor and higher with a serial interface and a Windows 9x/2000/NT 4.0/XP operating system. The SLG is connected to a serial interface of the computer. Users work with the PC interfaces COM 1 and/or COM 2; further interfaces can be operated with additional hardware. For programming, a 32 bit library (MDWAPI for Windows 9x / 2000, NT 4.0l and XP) and programming guide are available to the user on the CD RFID Systems Software & Documentation. For computers that are not used under Windows (e.g. UNIX), the communication procedure is described in the programming guide (MDWAPI). MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 151 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.1 Overview of SLG with RS 232 serial interface Default parameters The configuration parameters are described in the programming guide (MDWAPI). Table 6- 2 Ordering data for CD RFID Systems Software & Documentation Product Order No. CD RFID Systems Software & Documentation 6GT2080-2AA10 Note About MOBY software and licensing When purchasing an interface module or SLG, neither software nor documentation is supplied. The CD RFID Systems Software & Documentation contains all available FBs/FCs for SIMATIC, C libraries for Windows Professional, demo programs, etc. and needs to be ordered separately. In addition, the CD-ROM contains the complete MOBY documentation (German, English and some French) in PDF format. The purchase of an interface module or SLG includes a payment for the use of the software, including documentation, on the CD RFID Systems Software & Documentation and the purchaser acquires the right to make copies (copy license) insofar as they are required as part of the customer-specific application or development for the plant. The enclosed contract pertaining to the use of software products against a one-off payment shall apply in addition. 152 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.2 SLG D10 basic unit 6.2 SLG D10 basic unit 6.2.1 Features SLG D10 Features Performance range The SLG D10 is a basic unit in the highend range with a serial interface. Interface RS232 serial interface Range up to 650 mm (depends on antenna) Communication with a PC or third-party controllers Connectable antennas ANT D5 ANT D6 ANT D10 (2 to 4 antennas can be connected via an antenna duplexer) 6.2.2 Programming options via C library, Windows 9x, 2000, NT or XP required Degree of protection IP65 Multitag capability Yes Ordering data Table 6- 3 Ordering data for SLG D10 SLG D10 Order No. SLG D10 basic unit without antenna; with RS 232 serial interface for standard PC 6GT2698-1AA00 Table 6- 4 Ordering data for SLG D10 accessories SLG D10 accessories Order No. 24 V connecting cable Length 5 m 6GT2491-1HH50 RS232 cable Length 5 m 6GT2691-0BH50 Length 20 m 6GT2691-0BN20 EU 6GT2898-0AA00 UK 6GT2898-0AA10 US 6GT2698-0AA20 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (100...240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m plug-in cable with country-specific connector. For further information, see Chapter Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (Page 267) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 153 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.2 SLG D10 basic unit 6.2.3 Technical data Table 6- 5 Technical data for SLG D10 basic unit Inductive interface to the MDS Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Transponders supported Transponders according to ISO 15693 and I-Code1 Serial interface to the user RS 232 (RS 422 on request) Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit Data transmission rate 9600 baud to 115.2 Kbaud (adjustable) Data backup CRC 16 Transmit power up to 10 W Write/read distances SLG - MDS 650 mm typically (see field data) Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS, access rights, multitag Programming Windows 9x, 2000, NT, XP with 32 bit DLL available Multitag Yes Anti-collision speed approx. 20 labels/s simultaneously identifiable Power supply 154 Current consumption Operation Inrush current, momentary up to 1.4 A 2.8 A/50 ms Cable lengths With RS 232 30 m (depending on baud rate) Digital inputs/outputs None Enclosure dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 320 x 145 x 100 (without connector) Color Anthracite Material Aluminum Connector Antenna V24 interface Power supply Mounting 4 x M6 screws Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage MTBF 7.5 x 10 4 hours Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor use only) Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum Type II 30 g TNC connector 9-pin Sub-D connector (male) 4-pin M12 connector (male) -20 C to +55 C -25 C to +70 C MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.2 SLG D10 basic unit 6.2.4 Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/ 1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) Weight, approx. 3500 g Approvals CE FCC IC UL 60950 Harmless to heart pacemakers FCC information Siemens MOBY D SLG D10 FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD10 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 155 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.2 SLG D10 basic unit 6.2.5 Dimension drawing $ 3RZHU6XSSO\ $QWHQQD 9LQWHUIDFH 9LHZ$ 1RWH 7KH6/*PXVWEHJURXQGHGRQJURXQGLQJVFUHZ Dimensions in mm Figure 6-3 156 Dimension drawing of SLG D10 basic unit MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.3 SLG D11 basic unit 6.3 SLG D11 basic unit 6.3.1 Features SLG D11 Features Performance range The SLG D11 is a basic unit in the medium performance range with a serial interface. Interface RS232 serial interface Communication with a PC or third-party controllers Connectable antennas ANT D2 ANT D5 Programming options via a C library, Windows 9x, 2000, NT or XP required 6.3.2 Degree of protection IP65 Multitag capability Yes Ordering data Table 6- 6 SLG D11 ordering data SLG D11 Order No. SLG D11 without antenna; with RS232 serial interface for standard PC 6GT2698-1AC00 Table 6- 7 SLG D11 accessories ordering data SLG D11 accessories Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (100 - 240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m connecting cable and country-specific plug. Order No. EU 6GT2898-0AA00 UK 6GT2898-0AA10 US 6GT2698-0AA20 24 V connecting cable, Length 5 m 6GT2491-1HH50 RS232 cable Length 5 m 6GT2691-0BH50 Length 20 m 6GT2691-0BN20 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 157 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.3 SLG D11 basic unit 6.3.3 Technical specifications Table 6- 8 Technical data of SLG D11 Inductive interface to the MDS Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Transponders supported Transponders to ISO 15693 and I-Code1 Serial interface to the user RS 232 Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit Data transmission rate 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbaud (adjustable) Data backup CRC 16 Transmit power 1W Write/read distances SLG - MDS See Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS, access rights Programming Windows 9x, 2000, NT and XP, with 32 bit DLL available Multitag Yes Anti-collision speed approx. 20 labels/s simultaneously identifiable Power supply Rated value Permitted range Current consumption Operation Inrush current, momentary 200 mA 600 mA Cable length, SLG - PC With RS 232 Max. 30 m Digital inputs/outputs None Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 160 x 80 x 40 without connector Color Anthracite Material Plastic PA 12 Connectors Antenna (plugs into SLG) V24 interface Power supply SLG fixing 2 x M5 screws Tightening torque 2 Nm '&9 '&99 '&9s8/RQO\ TNC connector 9-pin Sub-D connector (male) 4-pin M12 connector (male) (at room temperature) 158 Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage MTBF 2.0 x 10 5 hours Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor only) -25 C to +55 C -25 C to +70 C MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.3 SLG D11 basic unit 6.3.4 Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum Type II 30 g Vibration resistance in accordance with EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) Weight, approx. 600 g Approvals CE FCC IC Harmless to heart pacemakers UL 60950 FCC information Siemens MOBY D SLG D11 FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD11 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 159 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.3 SLG D11 basic unit Dimension drawing 6.3.5 Dimensions in mm Figure 6-4 160 Dimension drawing of the SLG D11 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.4 SLG D12 6.4 SLG D12 6.4.1 Features SLG D12 6.4.2 Features Performance range The SLG D12 is a write/read device in the lower performance range with serial interface. Range up to 160 mm Interface RS232 serial interface Communication with a PC or third-party controllers Antenna integrated Programming options via a C library, Windows 9x, 2000, NT or XP required Degree of protection IP65 Multitag capability Yes Ordering data Table 6- 9 Ordering data for SLG D12 SLG D12 Order No. SLG D12 with integral antenna; 6GT2601-0AB00 with RS 232 serial interface for standard PC, Table 6- 10 Ordering data for SLG D12 accessories SLG D12 accessories Order No. Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems EU 6GT2898-0AA00 (100...240 V AC/24 V DC/3 A) UK 6GT2898-0AA10 with 2 m plug-in cable with country-specific connector. For further information, see Section Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (Page 267). US 6GT2698-0AA20 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 161 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.4 SLG D12 6.4.3 Technical data Table 6- 11 Technical data for SLG D12 Inductive interface to the MDS 162 Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Transponders supported Transponders according to ISO 15693 and I-Code1 Serial interface to the user RS 232 Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit Data transmission rate 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbaud (adjustable) Data backup CRC 16 Transmit power 1W Write/read distances SLG - MDS 160 mm typically (see field data) Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS, access rights, multitag Programming Windows 9x, 2000, NT and XP with 32 bit DLL available Multitag Yes Anti-collision speed approx. 20 labels/s simultaneously identifiable Power supply Rated value Permissible range Current consumption Operation Inrush current, momentary Cable length SLG - PC with RS 232 30 m Digital inputs/outputs None Enclosure dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 160 x 80 x 40 (without connector) Color Anthracite Material Plastic PA 12 Connector V24 interface Power supply Mounting 2 x M5 screws Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage MTBF 2.0 x 10 5 hours Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor use only) Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum Type II 30 g Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) '&9 '&99 '&9s8/RQO\ 150 mA 600 mA 9-pin Sub-D connector (male) 4-pin M12 connector (male) -25 C to +55 C -25 C to +70 C MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.4 SLG D12 Weight, approx. 500 g Approvals CE FCC IC Harmless to heart pacemakers UL 60950 Note The SLG D12 can process up to 4 MDS with I-Code 1-Chip (e.g. MDS D139) in multitag mode! 6.4.4 FCC information Siemens MOBY D SLG D12 FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD12 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 163 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.4 SLG D12 6.4.5 Transmission window 6LGHYLHZ 6J 7UDQVSRQGHU 6D 7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ 6/*' 3ODQYLHZ 6WDQGDUG FRQILJXUDWLRQ /RQJLWXGLQDO[D[LV /[ /\ 0 /[ Lx 120 mm Ly 60 mm Figure 6-5 164 Transmission window for SLG D12 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.4 SLG D12 6.4.6 Secondary fields $X[LOLDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG 0'6 0'6 $X[LOLDU\ILHOG &RQYH\LQJXQLW 0'6 &RQYH\LQJXQLW ,QFRUUHFW 6/* 0DLQILHOG &RUUHFW 6/* 0'6 0HWDO Figure 6-6 MDS shielding To avoid undesired reading of the MDS outside the main field, the MDS must be shielded. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 165 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.4 SLG D12 6.4.7 Influence of metal $X[LOLDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG 6/* 0DLQILHOGUHGXFHG 0HWDO Figure 6-7 166 6/* Reduction in range through influence of metal MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.4 SLG D12 6.4.8 Metal-free area 0HWDO K K +HLJKWRIWKH6/* PP E E D D 0HWDO DE 0HWDOIUHHGLVWDQFHV PP Figure 6-8 Metal-free area for SLG D12 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 167 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.4 SLG D12 6.4.9 Minimum distances between several SLGs Definition of distance D ' ' D 0.5 m Figure 6-9 168 Distance D: SLG D12 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.4 SLG D12 6.4.10 Dimension drawing ; < $ 3RZHU6XSSO\ 9LQWHUIDFH 9LHZ$ Dimensions in mm Figure 6-10 Dimension drawing of SLG D12 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 169 Write/read devices with RS232 interface 6.4 SLG D12 170 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.1 7 Overview SLG with RS 422 for SIMATIC S7 and PROFIBUS DP-V1 $60I3/4U 352),%86 '39 $60I3/4U 352),%86 '3'39 $60 I3/4U (7; $60 5)& I3/4U I3/4U 6,0$7,&6 (7SUR 5)& 5)& I3/4U352),1(7,2 6\VWHPLQWHUQDO56LQWHUIDFH 6/*'6 $17' Figure 7-1 6/*'6 $17' $17' 6/*'6 $17' Write/read devices with RS422 interface MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 171 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.1 Overview SLG with RS 422 for SIMATIC S7 and PROFIBUS DP-V1 Application area The SLG D1xS provides inductive communication with the mobile data storage units (MDS) and serial coupling to the interface modules (ASM). A range of different SLGs are available for small, medium and large distances to the MDS meeting all customer requirements. SLG D10S with - ANT D5 - ANT D6 - ANT D10 SLG D11S with - ANT D2 - ANT D5 SLG D12S with integral antenna SLG D12S with integral antenna (plug-in version) The rugged housing and high degree of protection (IP65) permit use even under the toughest industrial conditions. Design and function The SLG implements the commands received from the interface module. These commands and the data to be written or read are processed by a corresponding modulator/demodulator circuit. Communication between the MDS and SLG is performed over an inductive alternating field. The transmittable quantity of information between SLG and MDS depends on: The speed at which the MDS moves through the transmission window of the SLG antenna The length of the transmission window The MDS type Table 7- 1 Overview of SLG with RS 422 interface SLG with ANT Operating distance Sa (depending on MDS) Limit distance Sg (depending on MDS) Temperature range (during operation) SLG dimensions Antenna (L x W x H) dimensions in mm (L x W x H) in mm SLG D10S ANT D5 0 to 400 mm 480 mm -20 to +55 C 320 x 145 x 100 340 x 325 x 38 IP65 ANT D6 0 to 550 mm 650 mm -20 to +55 C 320 x 145 x 100 580 x 480 x 110 IP65 ANT D10 0 to 400 mm 480 mm -20 to +55 C 320 x 145 x 100 1150 x 365 x 115 IP65 ANT D2 35 to 70 mm 90 mm -20 to +70 C 160 x 80 x 40 75 x 75 x 40 IP65 ANT D5 0 to 300 mm 380 mm -20 to +55 C 160 x 80 x 40 340 x 325 x 38 IP65 SLG D12S 1) 0 to 120 mm 160 mm -20 to +55 C 160 x 80 x 40 - IP65 SLG D12S (plug-in version) 1) 0 to 120 mm 160 mm -25 to +55 C 160 x 80 x 40 - IP67 SLG D11S 1) Degree of protecti on Integral antenna 172 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.1 Overview SLG with RS 422 for SIMATIC S7 and PROFIBUS DP-V1 Definition of IP65: Protection against the ingress of dust (dustproof) Complete touch protection Protection against water jets MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 173 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.2 SLG D10S basic unit 7.2 SLG D10S basic unit 7.2.1 Features SLG D10S Features Performance range The SLG D10S is a basic unit in the high-end range with a serial interface. Interface Serial interface RS 422 Communication via interface modules to SIMATIC S7 or PROFIBUS DP-V1/PROFINET/Ethernet IP Range up to 650 mm (depends on antenna) Connectable antennas ANT D5 ANT D6 ANT D10 (2 to 4 antennas can be connected via an antenna duplexer) 174 ASM 452 ASM 456 ASM 473 ASM 475 RF170C RF180C RF182C Connectable ASM Degree of protection IP65 Multitag capability Yes MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.2 SLG D10S basic unit 7.2.2 Ordering data Table 7- 2 Ordering data for SLG D10S basic unit SLG D10S Order No. SLG D10S basic device without antenna; with serial interface RS422 for connection to ASM 4xx 6GT2698-2AA00 Table 7- 3 Ordering data for SLG D10S basic unit accessories SLG D10S accessories Order No. 24 V connecting cable Length 5 m 6GT2491-1HH50 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (100...240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m plug-in cable with country-specific connector. For further information, see Chapter Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (Page 267) EU 6GT2898-0AA00 UK 6GT2898-0AA10 US 6GT2698-0AA20 Length 2 m 6GT2691-0FH20 Length 2 m 6GT2891-0EH20 Length 5 m 6GT2891-0EH50 ASM 473 Length 2 m 6GT2891-1CH20 ASM 452 Length 5 m 6GT2891-1CH50 Length 2 m 6GT2891-0FH20 Length 5 m 6GT2891-0FH50 Length 10 m 6GT2891-0FN10 Length 20 m 6GT2891-0FN20 Length 50 m 6GT2891-0FN50 ASM - SLG D10S plug-in cables ASM 456 RF170C RF180C RF182C ASM plug-in cables ASM 475 Extension cables ASM 456 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 175 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.2 SLG D10S basic unit 7.2.3 Technical data Table 7- 4 Technical data for SLG D10S basic unit Inductive interface to the MDS Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Transponders supported Transponders according to ISO 15693 and ICode1 Serial interface to the user RS 422 Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit Data transmission rate 19.2 Kbaud to 115.2 Kbaud (depending on ASM) Data backup CRC 16 Transmit power up to 10 W Write/read distances for SLG 650 mm typically (see field data) Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS The Repeat command is not permissible. A buffer of up to 256 bytes is available in the SLG for concatenating commands For one command, therefore, it is only possible to combine commands until the sum of the header and user data of the individual message frames does not exceed this value. FC 45 limits the user data length for each individual message frame to 233 bytes. Programming FC 45 Transmission protocol 3964R Multitag Available soon Power supply 176 '&9s Current consumption Operation Inrush current, momentary up to 1.4 A 2.8 A/50 ms Cable length for SLG S7 With RS 422 300 m Digital inputs/outputs None Enclosure dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 320 x 145 x 100 (without connector) Color Anthracite Material Aluminum Connector Antenna (plugs into SLG) RS 422 interface Power supply SLG fixing 4 x M6 screws TNC connector 9-pin Sub-D connector (male) 4-pin M12 connector (male) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.2 SLG D10S basic unit 7.2.4 Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage MTBF 7.5 x 10 4 hours Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor use only) Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum Type II 30 g Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) Weight, approx. 3500 g Approvals -20 C to +55 C -25 C to +70 C CE FCC IC Harmless to heart pacemakers UL 60950 FCC information Siemens MOBY D SLG D10S FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD10 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 177 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.2 SLG D10S basic unit 7.2.5 Dimension drawing $ 3RZHU6XSSO\ $QWHQQD 56LQWHUIDFH 9LHZ$ 1RWH 7KH6/*PXVWEHJURXQGHGRQJURXQGLQJVFUHZ Dimensions in mm Figure 7-2 178 Dimension drawing of SLG D10S basic unit MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.3 SLG D11S basic unit 7.3 SLG D11S basic unit 7.3.1 Features SLG D11 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Features Performance range The SLG D11S is a basic unit in the medium performance range with a serial interface. Interface RS422 serial interface Communication via interface modules to SIMATIC S7 or PROFIBUS DPV1/PROFINET/Ethernet IP Connectable ASM ASM 452 ASM 456 ASM 473 ASM 475 RF170C RF180C RF182C Programming options e.g. via FC 45 Degree of protection IP65 Multitag capability no 179 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.3 SLG D11S basic unit 7.3.2 Ordering data Table 7- 5 Ordering data for SLG D11S basic unit SLG D11S Order No. SLG D11S basic device without antenna; with serial interface RS422 for connection to ASM. 6GT2698-2AC00 Table 7- 6 Ordering data for SLG D11S basic unit accessories SLG D11S accessories Order No. 24 V connecting cable Length 5 m 6GT2491-1HH50 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (100...240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m plug-in cable and country-specific connector EU 6GT2898-0AA00 UK 6GT2898-0AA10 US 6GT2898-0AA20 Length 2 m 6GT2691-0FH20 Length 2 m 6GT2891-0EH20 Length 5 m 6GT2891-0EH50 ASM 473 Length 2 m 6GT2891-1CH20 ASM 452 Length 5 m 6GT2891-1CH50 Length 2 m 6GT2891-0FH20 Length 5 m 6GT2891-0FH50 Length 10 m 6GT2891-0FN10 Length 20 m 6GT2891-0FN20 Length 50 m 6GT2891-0FN50 ASM - SLG D11S connecting cables ASM 456 RF170C RF180C RF182C ASM plug-in cables ASM 475 Extension cables ASM 456 180 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.3 SLG D11S basic unit 7.3.3 Technical specifications Table 7- 7 Technical data for SLG D11S Inductive interface to the MDS Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Transponders supported Transponders to ISO 15693 and I-Code1 Serial interface to the user RS 422 Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit Data transmission rate 19.2 Kbaud Data backup CRC 16 Transmit power 1 W (reset parameter 04 hex) Write/read distances SLG - MDS See Software functions Read, write and initialize MDS Concatenated commands are not permitted. The Repeat command is not implemented. The largest possible useful data length in a command is 233 bytes. Programming FC 45 Transmission protocol 3964R Multitag no Power supply Operation Permitted range Current consumption Operation Inrush current, momentary 200 mA 600 mA Cable length SLG - SIMATIC S7 With RS 422 300 m Digital inputs/outputs None Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 160 x 80 x 40 without connector Color Anthracite Material Plastic PA 12 Connectors Antenna (plugs into SLG) RS-422 interface Power Supply SLG fixing 2 x M5 screws Tightening torque 2 Nm '&9 '&99 '&9s8/RQO\ TNC connector 9-pin Sub-D connector (male) 4-pin M12 connector (male) (at room temperature) Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 -25 C to +55 C -25 C to +70 C 181 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.3 SLG D11S basic unit MTBF 7.3.4 2.0 x 10 5 hours Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: For indoor use only) Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, Type II 30 g Vibration resistance in accordance with EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/ 1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) Weight, approx. 600 g Approvals CE FCC IC Harmless to heart pacemakers UL 60950 FCC information Siemens MOBY D SLG D11S FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD11 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 182 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.3 SLG D11S basic unit 7.3.5 Dimension drawing 3RZHUVXSSO\ 56& PD[ PP )HUULW 0LQLPXPEHQGLQJ UDGLXVPP Dimensions in mm Figure 7-3 Dimension drawing of SLG D11S MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 183 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.4 SLG D12S 7.4 SLG D12S 7.4.1 Features SLG D12S 184 Features Performance range The SLG D12S is a write/read device in the lower performance range with serial interface. Range up to 160 mm Interface RS232 serial interface Communication via interface modules to SIMATIC S7 or PROFIBUS DP-V1/PROFINET/Ethernet IP Connectable ASM Antenna integrated Programming options e.g. via FC 45 ASM 452 ASM 456 ASM 473 ASM 475 RF170C RF180C RF182C Degree of protection IP65 Multitag capability no MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.4 SLG D12S 7.4.2 Ordering data Table 7- 8 Ordering data for SLG D12S SLG D12S Order No. SLG D12S with integrated antenna; with serial interface RS422 for connection to ASM 6GT2602-0AB00 Table 7- 9 Ordering data for SLG D12S accessories SLG D12S accessories Order No. 24 V connecting cable Length 5 m 6GT2491-1HH50 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (100...240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m plug-in cable with country-specific connector. For further information, see Chapter Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (Page 267) EU 6GT2898-0AA00 UK 6GT2898-0AA10 US 6GT2698-0AA20 Length 2 m 6GT2691-0FH20 Length 2 m 6GT2891-0EH20 Length 5 m 6GT2891-0EH50 ASM 473 Length 2 m 6GT2891-1CH20 ASM 452 Length 5 m 6GT2891-1CH50 Length 2 m 6GT2891-0FH20 Length 5 m 6GT2891-0FH50 Length 10 m 6GT2891-0FN10 Length 20 m 6GT2891-0FN20 Length 50 m 6GT2891-0FN50 ASM - SLG D12S plug-in cables ASM 456 RF170C RF180C RF182C ASM plug-in cables ASM 475 Extension cables ASM 456 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 185 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.4 SLG D12S 7.4.3 Technical data Table 7- 10 Technical data for SLG D12S Inductive interface to the MDS 186 Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Transponders supported Transponders according to ISO 15693 and I-Code1 Serial interface to the user RS 422 Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit Data transmission rate 19.2 Kbaud Data backup CRC 16 Transmit power 1 W (reset parameter 04 hex) Write/read distances SLG - MDS 160 mm typically (see field data) Software functions Read, write and initialize MDS Concatenated commands are not permitted. The Repeat command is not implemented. The largest possible useful data length in a command is 233 bytes. Programming FC 45 Transmission protocol 3964R Multitag no Power supply Operation Permissible range Current consumption Operation Inrush current, momentary 150 mA 600 mA Cable length SLG - SIMATIC S7 With RS 422 300 m Digital inputs/outputs None Enclosure dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 160 x 80 x 40 (without connector) '&9 '&99 '&9s8/RQO\ Color Anthracite Material Plastic PA 12 Connector RS 422 interface Power supply Mounting 2 x M5 screws Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage MTBF 2.0 x 10 5 hours Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor use only) 9-pin Sub-D connector (male) 4-pin M12 connector (male) -25 C to +55 C -25 C to +70 C MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.4 SLG D12S 7.4.4 Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum Type II 30 g Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/ 1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) Weight, approx. 600 g Approvals CE FCC IC Harmless to heart pacemakers UL 60950 FCC information Siemens MOBY D SLG D12S FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD12 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 187 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.4 SLG D12S 7.4.5 Transmission window 6LGHYLHZ 6J 7UDQVSRQGHU 6D 7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ 6/*'6 3ODQYLHZ 6WDQGDUG FRQILJXUDWLRQ /RQJLWXGLQDO[D[LV /[ /\ 0 /[ Lx 120 mm Ly 60 mm Figure 7-4 188 Transmission window for SLG D12S MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.4 SLG D12S 7.4.6 Secondary fields $X[LOLDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG 0'6 0'6 $X[LOLDU\ILHOG &RQYH\LQJXQLW 0'6 &RQYH\LQJXQLW ,QFRUUHFW 6/* 0DLQILHOG &RUUHFW 6/* 0'6 0HWDO Figure 7-5 MDS shielding To avoid undesired reading of the MDS outside the main field, the MDS must be shielded. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 189 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.4 SLG D12S 7.4.7 Influence of metal $X[LOLDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG 6/* 0DLQILHOGUHGXFHG 0HWDO Figure 7-6 190 6/* Reduction in range through influence of metal MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.4 SLG D12S 7.4.8 Metal-free area 0HWDO K K +HLJKWRIWKH6/* PP E E D D 0HWDO DE 0HWDOIUHHGLVWDQFHV PP Figure 7-7 Metal-free area for SLG D12S MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 191 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.4 SLG D12S 7.4.9 Minimum distances between several SLGs Definition of distance D ' ' D 0.5 m Figure 7-8 192 Distance D: SLG D12S MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.4 SLG D12S 7.4.10 Dimension drawing ; < $ 3RZHU6XSSO\ 56LQWHUIDFH 9LHZ$ Dimensions in mm Figure 7-9 Dimension drawing of SLG D12S MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 193 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version) 7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version) 7.5.1 Features SLG D12S (plug-in version) 194 Features Performance range The SLG D12S (plug-in version) is a write/read device in the lower performance range with serial interface. Range up to 160 mm Interface RS422 serial interface 8-pin M12 connector for Power supply Data communication Communication via interface modules to SIMATIC S7 or PROFIBUS DP-V1/PROFINET/Ethernet IP Connectable ASM Antenna integrated Programming options e.g. via FB 45/FC 45 High degree of protection IP67 Multitag capability no ASM 452 ASM 456 ASM 473 ASM 475 RF170C RF180C RF182C MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version) 7.5.2 Ordering data Table 7- 11 SLG D12S special version ordering data SLG D12S special version Order No. Write/read device SLG D12S 6GT2602-0AB10-0AX0 With a serial RS 422 interface for connection to ASM 452, ASM 456, ASM 473, ASM 475, RF170C, RF180C and RF181C, with an integral antenna Table 7- 12 SLG D12S special version accessories ordering data SLG D12S special version accessories: Preassembled connection cables Reader - ASM Order No. ASM 475 Length: 2 m 6GT2891-0EH20 Length: 5 m 6GT2891-0EH50 ASM 452 Length: 2 m 6GT2891-1CH20 ASM 473 Length: 5 m 6GT2891-1CH50 ASM 456 Length: 2 m 6GT2891-0FH20 RF170C Length: 5 m 6GT2891-0FH50 RF180C Length: 10 m 6GT2891-0FN10 Length: 20 m 6GT2891-0FN20 Length: 50 m 6GT2891-0FN50 Note The connecting cables for ASM 475, ASM 452/473 can be extended accordingly with the connecting cables 6GT2891-0Fxxx. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 195 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version) 7.5.3 Technical specifications Table 7- 13 Technical specifications for SLG D12S special version Inductive interface to the MDS 196 Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Transponders supported Transponders to ISO 15693 and I-Code1 Serial interface to the user RS 422 Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit Data transmission rate 19.2 Kbaud Data backup CRC 16 Transmit power 1 W (reset parameter 04 hex) Write/read distances SLG - MDS 160 mm typically (see field data) Software functions Read, write and initialize MDS Concatenated commands are not permitted. The Repeat command is not implemented. The largest possible useful data length in a command is 233 bytes. Programming FB/FC 45 Transmission protocol 3964R Multitag no Power supply Via ASM Current consumption Operation Inrush current, momentary 150 mA 600 mA Cable length SLG - SIMATIC S7 With RS 422 300 m Digital inputs/outputs None Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 160 x 80 x 40 (without connector) Color Anthracite Material Plastic PA 12 Connector RS-422 interface/power supply Mounting 2 x M5 screws Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage MTBF 2.0 x 105 hours Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP67 Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, Type II 30 g Vibration compliant with EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/ 1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) 8-pin M12 connector (male) -25 C to +55 C -25 C to +70 C MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version) 7.5.4 Weight, approx. 600 g Approvals CE Harmless to heart pacemakers Field data Table 7- 14 Field data for SLG D12S special version Limit distance (Sg) max. 160 mm (dependent on transponder) Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 120 mm (dependent on transponder) Length of transmission window (Lx/Ly) 120 mm/60 mm Width of the transmission window (Wx/Wy) 48 mm/24 mm Minimum distance from SLG D12S to SLG D12S 0.5 m See also MOBY D System Manual, Chapter . MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 197 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version) 7.5.5 Transmission window Side view Transmission window Transponder 6J 6D 6/* 6/*'6 Plan view Transmission window /\ 0 /[ Standard configuration longitudinal, X-axis (Lx) 198 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version) 7.5.6 Secondary fields 6HFRQGDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG 0'6 0'6 6HFRQGDU\ILHOG &RQYH\LQJXQLW 0'6 &RQYH\LQJXQLW ,QFRUUHFW 6/* 0DLQILHOG &RUUHFW 6/* 0'6 0HWDO Figure 7-10 MDS shielding To avoid undesired reading of the MDS outside the main field, the MDS must be shielded. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 199 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version) 7.5.7 Influence of metal 6HFRQGDU\ILHOG 0DLQILHOG 6/* 0DLQILHOGUHGXFHG 0HWDO Figure 7-11 200 6/* Reduction in range through influence of metal MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version) 7.5.8 Metal-free area Mounting the SLG D12S special version on metal K = Metal h h = Mechanical height of the SLG = 40 mm Flush-mounting of SLG D12S special version in metal: E E D D = Metal a, b = Metal-free distances = 50 mm When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the System Manual's Chapter . MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 201 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version) 7.5.9 Minimum distances between several SLGs ' ' Distance D 0.5 m 202 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version) 7.5.10 Dimensional diagram ; < $ 9LHZ$ Dimensions in mm Figure 7-12 Dimension drawing of SLG D12S special version MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 203 Write/read devices with RS422 interface 7.5 SLG D12S (plug-in version) 204 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 8 Antennas 8.1 ANT D2 8.1.1 Features ANT D2 8.1.2 Features Applications Suitable for high speeds, e.g. in Overhead conveyors Assembly lines Production Order picking Antenna field Designed for transponders that are directed sideways past the antenna. See Chapter Transmission window (Page 207) Writing/reading distance typ. 60 mm; Connecting cable 3.3 m (included in scope of supply) Connectable SLGs Degree of protection IP65 SLG D11 SLG D11S Ordering data Table 8- 1 ANT D2 ordering data Product Order No. ANT D2 incl. antenna cable (3.3 m) 6GT2698-5BB00 Table 8- 2 Ordering data for ANTD2 accessories Accessories Order No. Antenna duplexer 6GT2690-0AC00 (with 1 antenna connecting cable 3.3 m) Antenna cable, length 10.5 m 6GT2691-0CN10 Antenna extension, length 7.2 m 6GT2691-0DH72 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 205 Antennas 8.1 ANT D2 8.1.3 Technical specifications for ANT D2 Table 8- 3 Technical specifications for ANT D2 Max. write/read distance ANT to MDS (Sg) See also Field data for MDS and SLG. Dimensions in mm (L x W x H) 75 x 75 x 40 Antenna cable length in 3.3 m Color Anthracite Material PA 12 (polyamide 12) Plug connection Single-pole TNC connector Max. power 4W Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 50 g 7M2 Total shock response spectrum Type II Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 10 g (5...500 Hz) Attachment of the antenna 2 x M5 screws Tightening torque 2 Nm (at room temperature) 206 Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage MTBF 2 x 107 hours Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 Weight, approx. 260 g Approvals -20 C to +70 C -25 C to +85 C CE FCC IC Harmless to heart pacemakers in combination with SLG D11/D11S MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Antennas 8.1 ANT D2 8.1.4 Transmission window Figure 8-1 Transmission window for ANT D2 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 3 Level 3 Direction of motion of the transponder Green Main field (processing field) Blue Secondary fields Operating range (Sa) The operating range lies between level 1 and level 3. The operating range between level 1 and 2 includes secondary fields. The recommended operating range therefore lies in the green main field between Level 2 and Level 3. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 207 Antennas 8.1 ANT D2 Limit distance (Sg) The limit distance lies on Level 3 Lateral view Level 2 / Lateral view Level 1 L: Length of the transmission window 8.1.5 Metal-free area Direct mounting of the ANT D2 on metal is permitted. No range losses must be expected here. Figure 8-2 208 Metal-free area for ANT D2 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Antennas 8.1 ANT D2 8.1.6 Minimum distance between several ANT D2 antennas ' ' Figure 8-3 Minimum distance between several ANT D2 antennas Minimum distance D from ANT D2 to ANT D2 Dimension drawing 8.1.7 D 500 mm Figure 8-4 02%<' $17' Dimension drawing for ANT D2 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 209 Antennas 8.2 ANT D5 8.2 ANT D5 8.2.1 Features ANT D5 8.2.2 Features Applications Storage, logistics and distribution Writing/reading distance Up to 480 mm (depending on MDS) Connecting cable 3.3 m; pre-assembled Connectable SLG Degree of protection IP65 SLG D10/10S SLG D11/11S Ordering data Table 8- 4 Ordering data of ANT D5 ANT D5 Order No. Dimensions L x W x H in mm: 340 x 325 x 38 Antenna cable 3.3 m; permanently preassembled Table 8- 5 6GT2698-5AA00 Ordering data of ANT D5 accessories Accessories Order No. Spacer kit for ANT D5 made of aluminum with plastic spacers incl. fixing screws 6GT2690-0AB00 Individual parts: 1 aluminum plate 380 x 380 x 2 4 plastic bolts 100 x 20 4 countersunk-head screws M5 x 12 4 combination screws M5 x 20 210 Antenna duplexer (with 1 antenna connecting cable 3.3 m) 6GT2690-0AC00 Antenna cable, length 10.5 m 6GT2691-0CN10 Antenna extension, length 7.2 m 6GT2691-0DH72 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Antennas 8.2 ANT D5 8.2.3 Technical data Table 8- 6 Technical specifications for ANT D5 Max. write/read distance ANT to MDS (Sg) 480 mm 1) Dimensions in mm (L x W x H) 340 x 325 x 38 Color Black Material Plastic ASA Plug connection 1-pin TNC connector Max. power 10 W (FCC/IC:4 W) Antenna cable length 3.6 m Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum Type II 30 g Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) Attachment of the antenna 4 x M5 screws Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage MTBF 3 x 10 5 hours Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor use only) Weight, approx. 1 kg Approvals 1) -20 C to +55 C -25 C to +70 C CE FCC IC Harmless to heart pacemakers UL 60950 In order to ensure optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal (see the accessory "Spacer kit" in the ordering data section). MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 211 Antennas 8.2 ANT D5 8.2.4 Transmission window /G 3ODQYLHZ 6DPLQ 6J 6DPD[ )RU6DPLQWKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZLVH[WHQGHG 6LGHYLHZ 7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ $17' 6D 6J PP 6SDFHUNLW 0HWDOSODWH Ld = 300 mm Figure 8-5 212 Transmission window for ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Antennas 8.2 ANT D5 8.2.5 Metal-free area Flush-mounted in metal 0HWDO D D D D K PP QRQPHWDOVSDFHU D PP Figure 8-6 Metal-free area for ANT D5 For further information on spacers, see section Ordering data (Page 210) ANT D5 accessories, spacer kit, as well as Dimension drawings (Page 215). When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Section See also Planning the MOBY D system (Page 25) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 213 Antennas 8.2 ANT D5 8.2.6 Minimum distance between antennas Definition of distance D ' ' 'LVWDQFH'P Figure 8-7 214 Distance D: ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Antennas 8.2 ANT D5 8.2.7 Dimension drawings Dimension drawing for ANT D5 [ &DEOHNLQNSURWHFWLRQ IOH[LEOHLQHYHU\GLUHFWLRQ 0LQLPXP EHQGLQJ UDGLXVPP )HUULWH &DEOHOHQJWKP PD[ PP Figure 8-8 Dimension drawing for ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 215 Antennas 8.2 ANT D5 Dimension drawing and sketch for mounting spacer kit $OXPLQLXPSODWH 5 7 3ODVWLFEROWV 0[ Figure 8-9 216 Dimension drawing for ANT D5 spacer kit MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Antennas 8.2 ANT D5 +ROHVIRU$17' Figure 8-10 Sketch for mounting spacer kit MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 217 Antennas 8.3 ANT D6 8.3 ANT D6 8.3.1 Features ANT D6 Features &RYHULQJKRRG $17' 8.3.2 Storage, logistics and distribution Suitable for high-speed applications with large writing/reading distance Applications Writing/reading distance Up to 650 mm (depending on MDS) Connecting cable 3.3 m; included in scope of supply Covering hood Available as accessory Connectable SLG SLG D10/10S Degree of protection IP65 (can also be achieved without covering hood) Ordering data Table 8- 7 ANT D6 ordering data ANT D6 Order No. Dimensions L x W x H in mm: 580 x 480 x 110 (without cover) Antenna cable included in scope of supply Table 8- 8 6GT2698-5AB00 Ordering data for ANT D6 accessories Accessories Order No. Covering hood for ANT D6 6GT2690-0AD00 Antenna duplexer 6GT2690-0AC00 (with 1 antenna connecting cable 3.3 m) Antenna cable Antenna extension, length 7.2 m 218 Length 3.3 m 6GT2691-0CH33 Length 10.5 m 6GT2691-0CN10 6GT2691-0DH72 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Antennas 8.3 ANT D6 8.3.3 Technical data Table 8- 9 Technical specifications for ANT D6 Max. write/read distance ANT to MDS (Sg) 650 mm Dimensions in mm (L x W x H) 580 x 480 x 110 (without cover) Color Gray/black Material Aluminum/plastic Plug connection 1-pin TNC connector Max. power 10 W (FCC/IC: 2.5 W) Antenna cable length 3.3 m Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum Type II 30 g Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) Attachment of the antenna 4 x M6 screws Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage MTBF 3 x 10 5 hours Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor use only) Weight, approx. 3.3 kg Approvals MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 -20 C to +55 C -25 C to +70 C CE FCC IC Harmless to heart pacemakers UL 60950 219 Antennas 8.3 ANT D6 8.3.4 Transmission window 6DPLQ 6DPD[ 6J /\ 3ODQYLHZ /[ 6LGHYLHZ 6D 6J 7UDQVPLVVLRQ ZLQGRZ $17' )RU6DPLQWKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZLVH[WHQGHG Lx = 520 mm Ly = 420 mm Figure 8-11 220 Transmission window for ANT D6 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Antennas 8.3 ANT D6 8.3.5 Metal-free area Flush-mounted in metal D D D D 0HWDO D PP Figure 8-12 8.3.6 Metal-free area for ANT D6 Minimum distance between antennas Definition of distance D ' ' 'LVWDQFH'P Figure 8-13 Distance D: ANT D6 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 221 Antennas 8.3 ANT D6 8.3.7 Dimension drawing 0WKUHDGHGEXVK Figure 8-14 222 Dimension drawing for ANT D6 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Antennas 8.4 ANT D10 8.4 ANT D10 8.4.1 Features ANT D10 Features Applications 8.4.2 Storage, logistics and distribution, e.g. clothing industry, laundries Particularly when small MDS are used (e.g. MDS D124, MDS D160) and when there is a long transmission field Writing/reading distance Up to 480 mm (depending on MDS) Connecting cable 3.3 m; included in scope of supply Covering hood Available as accessory Connectable SLG SLG D10/D10S Ordering data Table 8- 10 Ordering data of ANT D10 ANT D10 Order No. Dimensions L x W x H in mm: 1150 x 365 x 115 (with cover) Antenna cable included in scope of supply Table 8- 11 6GT2698-5AF00 Ordering data of ANT D10 accessories Accessories Order No. Antenna duplexer 6GT2690-0AC00 (with 1 antenna connecting cable 3.3 m) Antenna cable Antenna extension, length 7.2 m MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Length 3.3 m 6GT2691-0CH33 Length 10.5 m 6GT2691-0CN10 6GT2691-0DH72 223 Antennas 8.4 ANT D10 8.4.3 Technical data Table 8- 12 Technical specifications for ANT D10 Max. write/read distance ANT to MDS (Sg) 480 mm Dimensions in mm (L x W x H) 1150 x 365 x 115 (with cover) Color Gray/black Material Aluminum/plastic Plug connection 1-pin TNC connector Max. power 10 W (FCC/IC: 2.5 W) Antenna cable length 3.3 m Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum Type II 30 g Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) Attachment of the antenna 4 x M6 screws Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage MTBF 3 x 10 5 hours Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor use only) Weight, approx. 10 kg (with cover) Approvals 224 -20 C to +55 C -25 C to +70 C CE FCC IC Harmless to heart pacemakers UL 60950 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Antennas 8.4 ANT D10 8.4.4 Transmission window 6DPLQ 6DPD[ 6J /\ 3ODQYLHZ /[ 7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ 6D 6J 6LGHYLHZ $17'ZLWKFRYHU )RU6DPLQWKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZLVH[WHQGHG Lx 1050 mm Ly 350 mm Figure 8-15 Transmission window for ANT D10 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 225 Antennas 8.4 ANT D10 8.4.5 Metal-free area Flush-mounted in metal D D D D 0HWDO D PP Figure 8-16 Metal-free area for ANT D10 When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Section . 226 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Antennas 8.4 ANT D10 8.4.6 Minimum distance between antennas Definition of distance D ' ' 'LVWDQFH'P Figure 8-17 Distance D: ANT D10 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 227 Antennas 8.4 ANT D10 8.4.7 Dimension drawing 02%<' *HZLQGHEXFKVH0 Figure 8-18 228 Dimension drawing for ANT D10 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9 Application area The ASM interface modules are links between the MOBY D components SLG/MDS and the higher-level control systems (e.g. SIMATIC S7) or PC or computers. Depending on the interface module used, up to two SLGs can be connected. Design and functions The ASM comprises a microcontroller system with an individual program (PROM). The CPU receives commands over the user interface and saves them in RAM. The user receives an acknowledgement that the command has arrived. If the command is valid, the CPU starts to process it. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 229 System integration Overview Table 9- 1 Overview of interface modules ASM type Interfaces to PC/computer Interfaces to SLG Function blocks SLG Dimensions connections (W x H x D in mm) Temperature range (during operation) Degree of protectio n ASM 452 PROFIBUS DP-V1 2 x 5-pin BERO connector FC 45 1 134 x 110 x 55 0 to +55 C IP67 ASM 456 PROFIBUS DP-V1 2 x 8-pin FC 45 connection socket, FB 45 M12 FC 55 FB 55 2 (simultaneo usly) 60 x 210 x 54 or 79 0 to +55 C IP67 ASM 473 For inserting in ET 200X 2 x 5-pin BERO connector FC 45 1 87 x 110 x 55 0 to +55 C IP67 ASM 475 For inserting in S7-300/ ET 200M Through screwtype terminals FC 45 2 (simultaneo usly) 40 x 125 x 120 0 to +60 C IP20 RF170C Can be plugged into ET 200pro 8-pin M12 connector FC 45 FB 45 FC 55 FC 56 2 (simultaneo usly) 1) 90 x 130 x 60 -25 to +55 C IP67 RF180C PROFINET 8-pin M12 connector FB 45 2 (simultaneo usly) 1) 60 x 210 x 30 0 to +60 C IP67 RF182C TCP/IP 2 x 8-pin -connection socket, M12 2 (simultaneo usly)1) 60 x 210 x 30 0 to +60 C IP67 1) If 2 readers are used on one ASM, the following restrictions apply: The maximum operating temperature is 35 C The input voltage is 24 V 10% Current consumption 425 mA per reader 230 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.1 ASM 452 9.1 ASM 452 9.1.1 Application area The ASM 452 interface module is a MOBY module for operating MOBY components over PROFIBUS DP-V1 on Any computers and PCs Any PLCs When operating the interface module on a SIMATIC S7, function blocks are made available to the user. Figure 9-1 9.1.2 ASM 452 interface module Features The ASM 452 is the result of consistent development of the familiar ASM 450 interface modules. Optimal data throughput can be achieved even in large-scale PROFIBUS configurations thanks to the use of acyclic data traffic on PROFIBUS DP V1. The minimum cyclic data load of the ASM 452 on the PROFIBUS DP provides the user with the guarantee that other PROFIBUS nodes (e.g. DI/DO) can still be processed at great speed. The ASM 452 is an interface module for communication between PROFIBUS DP and the SLG D1xS with RS 422. The data on the MDS D139/D160 can be physically addressed ("standard" addressing) through the ASM 452. In SIMATIC S7, FC 45 is available for "standard" addressing. The FC 45 provides the S7 user with an interface with powerful commands that is easy to operate. FC 45 also offers command concatenation (not with SLG D11S ANT D5 and SLG D12S) and S7 data structures with UDTs. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 231 System integration 9.1 ASM 452 9.1.3 Configuration Hardware description The ASM 452 has the same housing as the distributed I/O system ET 200X. General information on ASM 452 (e.g. assembly, operation and wiring; general technical data) is available in the ET200X manual (Order No. 6ES7198-8FA00-8AA0). Descriptions of accessories and network components can also be found in this manual. $7FRPS3& 352),%86'3 PDVWHUPRGXOH HJ6&38 352),%86&DEOH 7RIXUWKHU 352),%86 QRGHV 9 IRU$60 0'6' 6/*'6$17' Figure 9-2 232 ASM 452 configurator MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.1 ASM 452 9.1.4 PROFIBUS DP communication 9.1.4.1 PROFIBUS DP configuring The ASM 452 is integrated into the hardware configuration by means of a GSD file. The ASM can then be configured using the HW Config of SIMATIC Manager or another PROFIBUS DP tool. A GSD file is provided for ASM 452 on the "MOBY software" CD. 9.1.4.2 Operating mode of the ASM 452 The approved operating modes of ASM 452 are described in the GSD file. It is set using the hardware configuration tool (e.g. STEP 7 HW Config). 9.1.4.3 PROFIBUS DP diagnostics The following table lists possible error indications with their meanings and provides remedies. Table 9- 2 LED indication for PROFIBUS DP diagnostics "BF" LED "SF" LED Cause of error On * ASM 452 is in start-up mode. Communication to the DP master is down. ASM 452 not detecting a baud rate. Check the PROFIBUS DP connection. Check the DP master. Bus interruption DP master is out of service Check all cables on your PROFIBUS DP network. Check whether the connector plugs for PROFIBUS DP are securely plugged into the ASM 452. The configuration data sent to the ASM 452 by the DP master do not match the configuration of the ASM 452. ASM 452 has detected the baud rate, but is not being addressed by the DP Master. ASM 452 has not been configured. flashes flashes On off On flashes MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Error management - There is a hardware defect in the ASM 452. Check the configuration of the ASM 452 (input/output, PROFIBUS DP address). Correct GSD file being used? - SIEM80B6.GSD for ASM 452 Check the PROFIBUS DP address set on the ASM 452 or in the configuration software. Check the configuration of the ASM 452 (station type). Replace the ASM 452. 233 System integration 9.1 ASM 452 9.1.4.4 PROFIBUS DP address and terminating resistor You must remove the connector plate from the ASM before you set the PROFIBUS DP address or connect the terminating resistor. The connector plate covers the DIL switch. The position of the DIL switch in ASM is shown in the figure below with one setting example for each case. ([DPSOH7HUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRU2II $VGHOLYHUHGVWDWH RQ 2II ([DPSOH352),%86DGGUHVV RQGHOLYHU\ 21 Figure 9-3 6WDQGDUG PRGH XVH*6'ILOH 6,(0% Setting the PROFIBUS DP address/connecting the terminating resistor Note The PROFIBUS DP address in ASM 452 must always match the PROFIBUS DP address defined in the configuring software for this ASM. To ensure that the terminating resistor functions correctly, you must always switch both DIL switches of the terminating resistor to "on" or "off". 234 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.1 ASM 452 9.1.5 Device connections 9.1.5.1 Reader connection system An SLG always occupies two M12 connector sockets on the ASM 452. A pre-assembled cable therefore ensures easy connection of the SLG (see figure below). The standard version of the connection cable is 2 m in length, other lengths of 5 m and 20 m are available. 6/*VLGH $60VLGH ; ZKLWH ; EURZQ ; JUHHQ ; \HOORZ ; ; ; 7ZRSLQ0 FLUFXODUFRQQHFWRUV ; ; JUD\ SLQVXE' IHPDOHVFUHZ ORFNLQJ VKLHOG &DXWLRQ :KHQPHWDO6XE'FDVLQJVDUHXVHGRQWKH6/*VLGHWKHFDVLQJPXVWEH FRQQHFWHGWRWKHFDEOHVKLHOG Figure 9-4 Connecting cable ASM 452/473 SLG D1xS with RS 422 (6GT2491-1CH20) An SLG cable connector with screw-type terminals is provided for users who want to individually pre-assemble their own cables (see figure below). Cables and SLG cable connectors can be ordered from the MOBY catalog. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 235 System integration 9.1 ASM 452 6/*FDEOH*7$ 3*FDEOHJODQG PD[FDEOHGLDPHWHU PP RQO\WLJKWHQDIWHU DVVHPEOLQJSOXJ VFUHZV IRURSHQLQJ WKHFRQQHFWRU 'HJUHHRI SURWHFWLRQ,3 Figure 9-5 236 &RQQHFWRUFRYHUUHPRYHG &RXSOHUSOXJIURP 0WR$60 &RQQHF WRUSLQ :LUHFRORU 6 6 *UHHQ ZKLWH EURZQ \HOORZ *UD\ QF QF 6KLHOG 6 6 &RQQHFWHG WRSLQRI6/* FRQQHFWRU Cable connector ASM 452/473 SLG D1xS with RS 422 (6GT2090-0BC00) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.1 ASM 452 9.1.5.2 Pin assignments The figure below illustrates the pin assignments of ASM 452. $60b /('VIRU352),%86'3 6) 6\VWHP)DXOW %) %XV)DXOW 21 /LWZKHQORJLFYROWDJHLVDSSOLHGWRWKH$60 LWLVJHQHUDWHGIURPWKH9VXSSO\YROWDJH b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b 6/*LVVHOHFWHG 6/* 6/*LVVHOHFWHG 2QO\6/*FDQEHVHOHFWHG 6RFNHW 3LQDVVLJQPHQW 6/* 6LJQDO% UHG 3( 3( 6LJQDO$ JUHHQ / 0 ; ; 5[' 7[' 7[' 5[' 3( 3( / 0 3( / 0 ; ; ; 9 '2 9 '2 3( ; 9 ', 9 ', 3( 1RWFRQQHFWHG Figure 9-6 Pin assignment and LEDs of ASM 452 Note With MOBY D, the SLG power supply cannot be connected through the ASM. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 237 System integration 9.1 ASM 452 9.1.6 Cable 9.1.6.1 PROFIBUS DP cable with 24 V supply The ASM 452 can also be operated with the "green" PROFIBUS DP cable. It is important to ensure that a 24 V cable is connected from X12 to X13. The 24 V cable can be connected to pins 5 and 6 in plug X12. ; ; Figure 9-7 ; ; ; ; PROFIBUS DP cable with 24 V supply 9.1.6.2 Example of stripped lengths The following diagram shows an example of stripped lengths. The lengths apply to all cables which can be connected to the connector plugs. You must twist any shield braid present, plug into a core end sleeve and cut off any excess. 7ZLVWHGDQG WUXQFDWHG VKLHOGEUDLGLQJ Figure 9-8 238 Length of stripped insulation for PROFIBUS DP cables MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.1 ASM 452 9.1.7 Technical data Table 9- 3 Technical specifications for ASM 452 ASM 452 with FC 45 Serial interface to the user Procedure after connection PROFIBUS DP-V1 EN 50170 Vol. 2 PROFIBUS DP PG 11 cable gland PROFIBUS DP and power supply connectors are not included in the scope of delivery Data transfer rate 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud (automatic detection) Max. block length 2 words cyclic/240 bytes acyclic Serial interface to write/read device Connectors 2 x M12 coupler plug Max. cable length 2 m = Standard length; other preassembled cables: 5 m, 20 m (to 1000 m on request) Connectable SLGs 1x SLG D1xS with RS 422 Software functions Programming Depending on the PROFIBUS DP master Function blocks for SIMATIC S7 FC 45 MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS, etc. Multi-tag capability no S7 data structures via UDTs Yes Power supply 1 Rated value 24 V DC Permitted range 20 V to 30 V DC Current consumption Max. 180 mA; typ. 130 mA (without SLG, no load on DO) Digital Inputs None Digital outputs None Ambient temperature Operation 0 to +55C Transport and storage -40 C to +70 C Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 134 x 110 x 55 (without bus connector) Mounting technique 4 M5 screws; for mounting on any plate or wall Weight, approx. 0.5 kg Degree of protection IP67 MTBF (at 40 C) 30 * 104 hours = 34 years 1) With MOBY D, the SLG power supply cannot be connected through the ASM. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 239 System integration 9.1 ASM 452 9.1.8 Dimension diagram The following figure shows the dimensional drawing of an ASM 452 with bus connectors. You must add the length of the PG cable gland and the radius of the cable used to the measured overall width and depth. Figure 9-9 240 Dimensional drawing of ASM 452 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.1 ASM 452 9.1.9 Ordering data Table 9- 4 Ordering data for ASM 452 Designation Order No. ASM 452 interface module for PROFIBUS DP-V1 6GT2002-0EB20 1x SLG D1xS with RS 422 can be connected Accessories: Connector for PROFIBUS DP and 24 V supply 6ES7194-1AA01-0XA0 SLG cable ASM 452 SLG D1xS Length 2 m; standard cable 6GT2491-1CH20 Other lengths: 5m 6GT2491-1CH50 20 m 6GT2491-1CN20 Opt. Cable connector without SLG cable (for cable lengths > 20 m) ASM 452 SLG 6GT2090-0BC00 M12 blanking cap for unused SLG connection (1 pack = 10 pieces) 3RX9802-0AA00 CD RFID Systems Software & Documentation with FC 45, GSD file 6GT2080-2AA10 FC 45 Reference Manual German English French Available in electronic form on the CD RFID-Systems Software & Documentation Connector plate; T functionality for PROFIBUS DP connection 6ES7194-1FC00-0XA0 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 241 System integration 9.2 ASM 456 9.2 ASM 456 Configured with ASM 456 352),%86'3 0DVWHUPRGXOH 6,0$7,&b6 $60b 352),%86 9IRU $60DQGUHDGHU HJ 6/*'6 SOXJLQ YHUVLRQ HJ 6/*'6 SOXJLQ YHUVLRQ 9WRIXUWKHU 352),%86 EXVQRGHV WRIXUWKHU352),%86 EXVQRGHV 7DJV0'6 Figure 9-10 7DJV0'6 Configuration of ASM 456 For more detailed information, refer to ASM 456 Operating Instructions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/32629442). 242 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.3 ASM 473 9.3 ASM 473 9.3.1 Application area The ASM 473 interface module is a MOBY module for SIMATIC S7. It can be plugged into the ET 200X distributed I/O station and DESINA. ET 200X is operated by the user over PROFIBUS DP V1. An S7-300 or S7-400 with integrated PROFIBUS DP connection can be used as the controller. Figure 9-11 9.3.2 ASM 473 interface module Features ASM 473 supplements the SIMATIC S7 MOBY interface module ASM 475. The IP67 degree of protection means that it can be installed and operated in the process without the need for an additional protective housing. To operate the ASM 473, an ET 200X basic module BM 141/142 with the order number 6ES7141-1BF11-0XB0 or 6ES7142-1BD21-0XB0 or a BM 143 is required. The MDS data are accessed by means of physical addressing of the MDS. For operation in a SIMATIC S7, the function FC 45 is available. The hardware of the ASM 473 is configured with an object manager (OM) that is integrated in the SIMATIC Manager. Other features: Up to 7 ASM 473 interface modules can be operated simultaneously in an ET 200X station. Any other I/O modules from the ET 200X spectrum can be operated with the ASM 473. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 243 System integration 9.3 ASM 473 9.3.3 Basic module - Requirements for operation of ASM 473 The following table indicates the status of the ET 200X basic module of 10/2002. The functionality of new basic modules is stored in HW Config of the SIMATIC Manager. Table 9- 5 Requirements for operation of ASM 473 Order number of the ET 200X basic module For operation with ASM 473 (6GT2002-0HA00)* For operation with ASM 473 PARAM (6GT2002-0HA10) 6ES7141-1BF00-0XB0 no no 6ES7141-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes 6ES7141-1BF01-0XB0 no no 6ES7141-1BF10-0XB0 no no 6ES7141-1BF11-0XB0 Yes Yes 6ES7141-1BF40-0AB0 Yes Yes 6ES7142-1BD10-0XB0 no no 6ES7142-1BD11-0XB0 no no 6ES7142-1BD20-0XB0 no no 6ES7142-1BD21-0XB0 Yes Yes 6ES7142-1BD22-0XB0 no Yes** 6ES7143-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes 6ES7143-1BF00-0XB0 Yes Yes 6ES7147-1AA00-0XB0 no no 6ES7147-1AA01-0XB0 no Yes * Discontinued ** Notes on operation: In HW Config, please parameterize the module 6ES7142-1BD21-0XB0. 244 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.3 ASM 473 9.3.4 Configuration 352),%86'3PDVWHUPRGXOH HJ6 FRQQHFWLRQRIDQRQ6LHPHQV PDVWHUSRVVLEOHVRRQ 352),%86FDEOH WRDOO352),%86 VODYHV %DVLFPRGXOH HJ(7;%0 0'6 9SRZHUVXSSO\ 6/*'6$17' 352),%86FDEOH WRDOO352),%86 VODYHV Figure 9-12 Configurator for ASM 473 Note It differs from ASM 452 in that for ET 200X the 24 V supply must be connected to the PROFIBUS DP connector and to the load voltage connector (see the ET 200X manual). MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 245 System integration 9.3 ASM 473 maximum configuration 8SWR$60PRGXOHVFDQEH RSHUDWHGLQRQH(7;VWDWLRQ Figure 9-13 Maximum configuration of ASM 473 on an ET 200X Depending on the PROFIBUS DP master, up to 123 ET 200X modules can be run on one PROFIBUS DP segment. Hardware configuration The ASM 473 is integrated in the hardware configuration of the SIMATIC Manager by calling Setup.exe in the directory daten\S7_OM on the "Software MOBY" CD. Currently, the ASM 473 cannot be integrated in masters of other manufacturers. 246 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.3 ASM 473 9.3.5 Device connections 9.3.5.1 Reader connection system A write/read device always occupies the two M12 connection sockets X3 and X4 on the ASM 473. A prefabricated cable makes it easy to connect the write/read device. The standard version of the connecting cable is 2 m in length. Other cable lengths are available on request. For customers who want to assemble their own cables, an SLG cable connector with screwtype terminals is available. Cables and SLG cable connectors can be ordered from the MOBY catalog. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 247 System integration 9.3 ASM 473 9.3.5.2 Pin assignments The figure below illustrates the pin assignment for the write/read device and the display elements. 6RFNHW 3LQDVVLJQPHQW 6/* ; 5[' 7[' 7[' 5[' 3( ; 9 QbF 9 QbF 3( /('VIRU352),%86'3 *HQHUDOLQGLFDWRUV 6)%)219'& DUHORFDWHGRQWKHEDVLFPRGXOH RIWKH(7; /('VIRU02%< 5[' 35( (55 6/*DFWLYHZLWKFRPPDQG ,QGLFDWHVWKHSUHVHQFHRIDQ0'6 (UURULQGLFDWHGE\IODVKLQJVHTXHQFH 7KHIROORZLQJ$60VWDWHVDUHDOVRLQGLFDWHGZLWKWKH/('V35(DQG (55 35( (55 'HVFULSWLRQFDXVHVUHFWLILFDWLRQ 2))21 21 SHUP +DUGZDUHLVGHIHFWLYH 5$0IODVK 21 2)) &KDUJHULVGHIHFWLYH FDQRQO\EHUHSDLUHGLQWKH IDFWRU\ +] 2)) )LUPZDUHORDGLQJLVDFWLYHRUQR ILUPZDUHGHWHFWHG /RDGILUPZDUH $60PXVWQRWEHVZLWFKHGRIIXQWLOORDGHG +] +] )LUPZDUHORDGLQJWHUPLQDWHGZLWKHUURUV 5HVWDUWUHTXLUHG /RDGILUPZDUHDJDLQ &KHFNXSGDWHILOHV +] +] 2SHUDWLQJV\VWHPHUURU 6ZLWFK$60RU(7;EDVHVWDWLRQ2))21 2)) [IODVK HYHU\V $60KDVERRWHGDQGLVZDLWLQJIRUD5(6(7 LQLWBUXQ IURPWKHXVHU Figure 9-14 248 Interfaces and indicators of the ASM 473 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.3 ASM 473 Note With MOBY D, the SLG power supply cannot be connected through the ASM. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 249 System integration 9.3 ASM 473 9.3.6 Technical data Table 9- 6 Technical specifications for ASM 473 Interface for ET 200X SIMATIC S7 I/O bus cyclic/acyclic services Communication 2 words cyclic/238 bytes acyclic Command buffer in ASM 142 x 238 bytes Serial interface to write/read device Connectors Max. cable length Connectable SLGs 2 x M12 coupler plug 2 m = standard length; other pre-assembled cables = 5 m, 20 m (up to 1000 m on request) 1 x SLG D1xS with RS 422 Connectors 2 x M12 coupler plug Max. cable length 2 m = standard length; other pre-assembled cables = 5 m, 20 m (up to 1000 m on request) Connectable SLGs 1 x SLG D1xS with RS 422 Software functions Programming Depending on the PROFIBUS DP master Function blocks for SIMATIC S7 FC 45 MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS, etc. PROFIBUS DP diagnostics Yes; in accordance with ET 200X basic station S7 diagnostics Yes, can be called up via S7 OM Reloadable firmware Yes, via S7 OEM Power supply Rated value Permitted range 1 250 24 V DC 20.4 V to 28.8 V DC Current consumption Typ. 75 mA; max. 500 mA (or see Technical Data of the connected SLG) Power dissipation of the module Typ. 1.6 W Digital outputs/inputs Via expansion modules from the ET 200X spectrum Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage 0 to +55C -40 to +70C Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm Single unit Width module 87 x 110 x 55 60 x 110 x 55 Mounting technique 2 M5 screws (customer side) 2 M3 screws (product side) Degree of protection IP67 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.3 ASM 473 Weight, approx. 0.275 kg 1) With MOBY D, the SLG power supply cannot be connected through the ASM. Assembly instructions as well as general technical data can be found in the ET 200X manual (Order No. 6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0). 9.3.7 Dimension diagram Dimensioned Drawing for Fixing Holes The figure below shows the dimensions for the position of the holes for the fixing screws for a basic module and an ASM 473 expansion module. Q[ )RU0IL[LQJ VFUHZ %0 $60b Q 1XPEHURIH[SDQVLRQPRGXOHV Figure 9-15 Dimensions for fixing holes for basic modules and expansion modules MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 251 System integration 9.3 ASM 473 9.3.8 Ordering data Table 9- 7 Ordering data for ASM 473 Order No. ASM 473 interface module 1x SLG D1xS with RS 422 can be connected 6GT2002-0HA10 Accessories: SLG cable ASM 473 SLG D1xS Length 2 m; standard cable 6GT2491-1CH20 Other lengths: 5m 6GT2491-1CH50 20 m 6GT2491-1CN20 Opt. Cable connector without SLG cable ASM 473 SLG (for cable lengths > 20 m) 6GT2090-0BC00 CD RFID Systems Software & Documentation with FC 45, GSD file 6GT2080-2AA10 FC 45 Reference Manual Available in electronic form on the CD German English French 252 RFID Systems Software & Documentation MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.4 ASM 475 9.4 ASM 475 9.4.1 Application area The ASM 475 interface module can be inserted in SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M and can be used for all MOBY systems. As many as eight ASM 475 interface modules can be plugged into one SIMATIC S7-300 rack and operated. In a configuration with several racks (max. four), the ASM 475 can be plugged into and operated on any rack. This means that as many as 32 ASMs can be operated in the maximum configuration of a SIMATIC S7-300. The ASM can also be operated in the ET 200M distributed I/O on PROFIBUS DP. Operation in an S7-400 environment is therefore problem-free. Up to 8 ASMs can be operated on each ET 200M. Figure 9-16 ASM475 interface module FC 45 with project example You can load the FC with a project example from the corresponding subdirectory on the CD RFID Systems Software & Documentation using the "Dearchive file" function of SIMATIC Manager. You will then find the project example in the S7PROJ directory of SIMATIC Manager. Directory in SIMATIC Manager project name SIMATIC Manager path name FC 45 MOBY FC45 Moby_f_l RFID Systems Software & Documentation MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 253 System integration 9.4 ASM 475 9.4.2 Features Error messages and operating states are indicated by LEDs. A configuration that is resistant to interference is possible due to electrical isolation between the write/read device and the SIMATIC S7-300 bus. The ASM 475 with the order number 6GT2002-0GA10 is a parameterizable module. The basic functions of the module are then already specified when the module is configured in HW Config (e.g. standard addressing). The data in the MDS is accessed direct by means of physical addresses using the ASM 475. Operation in a SIMATIC S7 is controlled by the function FC 45. ASM 475 and FC 45 form a unit that is used for reading the data of the MDS easily and at optimal speed. A 32 KB MDS memory can be read in 24 seconds almost totally independently of the S7 cycle time. 9.4.3 Configuration $60 7HUPLQDOHOHPHQW (6%$$$ 7HUPLQDOHOHPHQW (6$$$$ IRUPRGXOHV 6/*'6 SOXJLQYHUVLRQ 6/*'6 SOXJLQYHUVLRQ Figure 9-17 254 Configuration for ASM 475 (centralized layout) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.4 ASM 475 wiring The ASM 475 is started up as follows: 1. Install the module 2. Install the module on the standard rail of the S7-300 (see the S7-300 manual) Note Before the module is mounted, the CPU of the S7-300 must be switched to the STOP state. WARNING Always switch off power before you start wiring the S7-300. Note To ensure problem-free operation of ASM 475, it is essential that the ASM and the SIMATIC CPU (or ASM and IM 153 for ET 200M operation) are operated with the same supply voltage. If this is not the case, when the ASM is switched on, it is possible that error flags on the CPU will not be reset. Configuring the ASM for SIMATIC S7 under STEP 7 Note For MOBY installation, STEP 7 software must be available for use on the PC/PG. Please ensure that you use the most recent STEP 7 version. ASM 475 is installed and configured in the SIMATIC controller using an installation program. The installation program is supplied on the CD RFID-Systems Software & Documentation (6GT2080-2AA10). Installation The installation instructions can be found on the CD RFID Systems Software & Documentation. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 255 System integration 9.4 ASM 475 9.4.4 Configuration Front panel The figure below illustrates the bezel of the ASM 475 and the inside of the front door complete with the associated connection diagram. The write/read devices must be connected to the ASM in accordance with the connection diagram. 02%< $60 6) 9'& (55B 6 35(B 6 ( ( $&7B (55B 35(B 6 6 ( ( 6/*b 5['B 6/*b $&7B 5['B *7b*$ 6WDWXVDQGHUURUGLVSOD\V Figure 9-18 &RQQHFWLRQGLDJUDP 7KHQXPEHUVRIWKH FRQQHFWLRQVUHIHUWR &RQQHFWRU;RIWKH WRSHQFORVXUHVHFWLRQ Bezel and inside of the front door of the ASM 475 Note With MOBY D, the SLG power supply cannot be connected through the ASM (exception: SLG D12S (plug-in version)). 256 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.4 ASM 475 9.4.5 PROFIBUS DP communication 9.4.5.1 Diagnosis using LEDs Display elements on the ASM Table 9- 8 Function of the LEDs on the ASM 475 Light emitting diode Meaning SF System fault (hardware error on ASM) 5 V DC 24 V are connected to the ASM and the 5 V voltage on the ASM is OK. ACT_1, ACT_2 The corresponding write/read device is active in processing a user command. ERR_1, ERR_2 A flashing pattern indicates the last error to occur. This display can be reset using the parameter Option 1. PRE_1, PRE_2 Indicates the presence of an MDS. RxD_1, RxD_2 Indicates continuous communication to the SLG. Faults on the SLG can also cause this indicator to be lit. On the ASM 475, further operating states are indicated with the LEDs PRE, ERR and SF: Table 9- 9 Operating status display on ASM 475 via LEDs SF PRE_1 ERR_1 ON OFF/ON ON (perm.) OFF/ON ON (perm.) Hardware is defective (RAM, Flash, etc.) ON OFF ON OFF OFF Charger is defective (can only be repaired in the factory). OFF 2 Hz OFF 2 Hz OFF Firmware loading is active or no firmware detected Firmware download ASM must not be switched off OFF 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz Firmware loading terminated with errors Restart required Load firmware again Check update files Any 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz Operating system error Switch ASM off/on OFF OFF 1 flash every 2 s OFF 1 flash every 2 s ASM has booted and is waiting for a RESET (init_run) from the user. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 PRE_2 ERR_2 Meaning 257 System integration 9.4 ASM 475 9.4.6 Device connections 9.4.6.1 Wiring to the SLG SLG D1x / SLG D1xS connection method The following figure shows the structure of a connecting cable between the ASM and SLG. The specified colors apply to the standard MOBY cable for ASM 475. 6/*VLGH &DEOHZLWKZLUHHQGIHUUXOHV $60VLGH ZKLWH EURZQ JUHHQ \HOORZ JUD\ SLQVXE' IHPDOHVFUHZ ORFNLQJ VKLHOG &DEOHVKLHOGH[SRVHG &DXWLRQ :KHQPHWDO6XE'FDVLQJVDUHXVHGRQWKH6/*VLGHWKHFDVLQJPXVW EHFRQQHFWHGWRWKHFDEOHVKLHOG Figure 9-19 258 Wiring from ASM 475 to SLG D1xS with RS422 (6GT2491-0E...) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.4 ASM 475 SLG D12S (plug-in version) connection method The connecting cable has a length of 2 m (standard) and 5 m. Extensions up to 1000 m are possible with the 6GT2891-0F... plug-in cables. $60VLGH 6/*VLGH &DEOHZLWKHQGVOHHYHV JUD\ SLQN \HOOR Z EURZQ ZKLWH JUHHQ VKLHOG 6/*FRQQHFWRU VRFNHW 0SLQ &DEOHVKLHOGH[SRVHG *7(ZLWKVWUDLJKW6/*FRQQHFWRU VWDQGDUG Figure 9-20 Connecting cable between ASM 475 and SLG D12S (plug-in version) with RS422 9.4.6.2 Shield connection +ROGLQJFOLS 7HUPLQDOHOHPHQW &DEOHWR6/* Figure 9-21 &DEOHWR6/* Configuration of ASM 475 with shield connecting element MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 259 System integration 9.4 ASM 475 9.4.6.3 Lightning protection Implement lightning protection provided that it is appropriate for your application. An individual appraisal of the entire plant is necessary before initiating any lightning protection measures. 9.4.7 Cable 9.4.7.1 Cable assembly by the customer To achieve electromagnetic compatibility, the SLG cable must be routed via an S7-300 shield connecting element. When the customer assembles the SLG cable, the cable shield must be exposed (see the figure below). 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 9-22 260 Exposure of the cable shield for cable assembly by the customer MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.4 ASM 475 9.4.8 Technical data Table 9- 10 Technical specifications for ASM 475 ASM 475 with FC 45 Serial interface for SIMATIC S7-300 or ET 200M I/O bus; cyclic and acyclic services Communication 2 words cyclic/238 bytes acyclic Command buffer in ASM 475 70 x 238 bytes per SLG D1xS Serial interface to write/read device Connectors Via screw-type terminal on front connector The front connector is not included in the scope of supply. Max. cable length Pre-assembled cables = 5 m, 20 m, 50 m (up to 1000 m on request) Connectable SLGs 2x SLG D1xS with RS 422 Simultaneous operation Software functions Programming Depending on the PROFIBUS DP master Function blocks for SIMATIC S7 FC 45 MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS Multitag mode no S7 data structures via UDTs Yes Power supply Rated value Permitted range 24 V DC 20.4 V to 28.8 V DC Current consumption Without SLG for U = 24 V DC, max. With SLG connected, max. 350 mA 500 mA, per connected SLG Power dissipation of the module, typ. 2W Current consumption from I/O bus, max. 80 mA Electrical isolation between S7-300 and MOBY Yes V24 fuse to SLG Yes, electronic 1 Ambient temperature During operation Horizontal installation of SIMATIC Vertical installation of SIMATIC Transport and storage 0 to +60 C 0 to +40 C -40 C to +70 C Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 40 x 125 x 120 Weight approx. 0.2 kg Degree of protection IP20 1) With MOBY D, the SLG power supply cannot be connected through the ASM. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 261 System integration 9.4 ASM 475 9.4.9 Ordering data Table 9- 11 Ordering data for ASM 475 Order No. ASM 475 interface module for SIMATIC S7 2 x SLG D1xS with RS 422 can be connected in parallel, without front connector 6GT2002-0GA10 Accessories: Front connector (1 x per ASM) 6ES7392-1AJ00-0AA0 SLG cable ASM 475 SLG D1xS; without SLG D12S (plug-in version) Lengths: 5m 6GT2491-0EH50 20 m 6GT2491-0EN20 50 m 6GT2491-0EN50 SLG cable ASM 475 SLG D12S (plug-in version) Opt. Cable connector without SLG cable (for cable lengths > 50 m) ASM 475 SLG 6GT2090-0BC00 Terminal element (1 x for each SLG cable) 6ES7390-5BA00-0AA0 Shield connecting element 6ES7390-5AA00-0AA0 CD RFID Systems Software & Documentation with FC 45, S7 object manager 6GT2080-2AA10 FC 45 Reference Manual Available in electronic form on the CD German English French 262 RFID Systems Software & Documentation MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.5 RF170C 9.5 RF170C Configured with RF170C 352),%86RU 352),1(7,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW 0DVWHUPRGXOH 6,0$7,&b6 352),1(7 ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW RU ,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH (7SUR 6,0$7,& 5)& 352),%86 HJ 6/*'6 SOXJLQ YHUVLRQ HJ 6/*'6 SOXJLQ YHUVLRQ 9IRU (7SUR5)& DQG6/* 0'6 Figure 9-23 Configuration of RF170C For more detailed information, refer to SIMATIC RF170C Operating Instructions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/32622825). MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 263 System integration 9.6 RF180C 9.6 RF180C Configured with RF180C 352),1(7,2 0DVWHUPRGXOH 6,0$7,&b6 6,0$7,& 5)& 352),1(7 ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW HJ 6/*'6 SOXJLQ YHUVLRQ HJ 6/*'6 SOXJLQ YHUVLRQ 9IRU 5)&DQG6/* 9WRIXUWKHU 352),1(7EXVQRGHV WRIXUWKHU352),1(7 EXVQRGHV Figure 9-24 0'6 Configuration of RF180C For more detailed information, refer to SIMATIC RF180C Operating Instructions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/30012157). 264 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 System integration 9.7 RF182C 9.7 RF182C Configuration with RF182C 352),1(7,2 0DVWHUPRGXOH 6,0$7,&b6 3& 6,0$7,& 5)& 352),1(7,2 ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW HJ 6/*'6 SOXJLQ YHUVLRQ HJ 6/*'6 SOXJLQ YHUVLRQ 9IRU 5)&DQGUHDGHU 7RDGGLWLRQDO352),1(7(WKHUQHWQRGHV 7DJV0'6 Figure 9-25 Configuration with RF182C For more detailed information, refer to SIMATIC RF182C Operating Instructions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/38507897). MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 265 System integration 9.7 RF182C 266 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 10 Accessories 10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems 10.1.1 Features Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (1) DC output 1 (2) DC output 2 (3) Mains connection Features Wide-range input (3) for use worldwide Dimensions without mains cable: 175 x 85 x 35 mm Dimensions including mains cable: 250 x 85 x 35 mm CE-compliant (EU and UK versions) UL-certified for US and Canada (US version) Mechanically and electrically rugged design Secondary side (1), (2): 24 V DC / 3 A Short-circuit and no-load stability Suitable for frame mounting 3 versions for use in the EU, UK, US MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 267 Accessories 10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems Description The wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems is a universal compact power supply and provides the user with an efficient, cost-saving solution for many different midrange power supply tasks. The primary switched power supply is designed for use on single-phase AC systems. The two DC outputs (sockets) are connected in parallel and protected by a built-in current limiting circuit against overload and short-circuits. The device is vacuum-cast and prepared for Safety Class 2 applications. The EU and UK versions satisfy the low-voltage guideline as well as the current EU standards for CE conformity. Furthermore, the US version has been UL-certified for the US and Canada. 10.1.2 Scope of supply Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems 2 m mains cable (country-specific) Protective cover for flange outlet Operating Instructions 10.1.3 268 Ordering data Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF-systems (100 - 240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m connecting cable with country-specific plug EU: 6GT2898-0AA00 UK: 6GT2898-0AA10 US: 6GT2898-0AA20 24 V-connecting cable, length 5 m 6GT2491-1HH50 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Accessories 10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems 10.1.4 Safety Information WARNING Danger to life It is not permitted to open the device or to modify the device. The following must also be taken into account: Failure to observe this requirement shall constitute a revocation of the CE approval, UL certification for the US and Canada as well as the manufacturer's warranty. For installation of the power supply, compliance with the DIN/VDE requirements or the country-specific regulations is essential. The field of application of the power supply is limited to "Information technology in electrical office equipment" within the scope of validity of the EN 60950/VDE 0805 standard. When the equipment is installed, it must be ensured that the mains socket outlet is freely accessible. The housing can reach a temperature of +25 C during operation without any adverse consequences. It must, however, be ensured that the power supply is covered in the case of a housing temperature of more than +25C to protect persons from contact with the hot housing. Adequate ventilation of the power supply must be maintained under these conditions. NOTICE The wide-range power supply unit must only be used for SIMATIC products in the specifically described operating range and for the documented intended use. If the wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (MLFB: 6GT2 898-0AA20) is used for an end product other than the SIMATIC RF600 system, the following must be taken into account: The electric strength test of the end product is to be based upon a maximum working voltage of: Transition from primary to SELV: 353 V DC, 620 Vpk The following secondary output circuits are SELV (low voltage; SELV = Safety Extra Low Voltage): all The following secondary output circuits are at non-hazardous energy levels: all The power supply terminals and/or connectors are suitable for field wiring if terminals are provided. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 269 Accessories 10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems The maximum investigated branch circuit rating is: 20 A The investigated pollution degree is: 2 WARNING If the wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (MLFB: 6GT2 898-0AA20) is connected to and in use for other products than the SIMATIC RF660R Portal Reader (MLFB: 6GT2811-0AA01), the end user is responsible and liable for any operation of the system or end product, which includes the wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (MLFB: 6GT2 898-0AA20). WARNING Alterations to the SIMATIC RF600 components and devices as well as the use of SIMATIC RF600 components with third-party RFID devices are not permitted. Failure to observe this requirement shall constitute a revocation of the radio equipment approvals, CE approval and manufacturer's warranty. Furthermore, the compliance to any salient safety specifications of VDE/DIN, IEC, EN, UL and CSA will not be guaranteed. Safety notes for the US and Canada The SIMATIC RF660R Portal Reader (MLFB: 6GT2811-0AA01) is for use only with the widerange power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (MLFB: 6GT2 898-0AA20) - as optional component - or with power supplies which are UL-listed according to the safety standards specified below: UL 60950-1 - Information Technology Equipment Safety - Part 1: General Requirements CSA C22.2 No. 60950 -1 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment. WARNING The compliance of the SIMATIC RF600 system to the safety standards mentioned above will not be guaranteed if neither the wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (MLFB: 6GT2 898-0AA20) nor power supplies listed according to the safety standards above are used. 270 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Accessories 10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems 10.1.5 Connecting There are three different (country-specific) mains cables for the EU, UK and US. The appropriate mains cable must be connected to the primary input of the power supply. NOTICE It is only permissible to insert or remove the mains cable when the power supply is deenergized. The wide-range power supply unit has total insulation (Safety Class 2), IP65 It can be mounted using four fixing holes. 10.1.6 Technical specifications Table 10- 1 General technical specifications Insulation stability (prim./sec.) Uins p/s 3.3 kVAC Insulation resistance Rins >1 G Leakage current Ileak Uin = 230 VAC, f = 50 Hz Safety class (SELV) Designed for installation in devices of Safety Class 2 Mains buffering th Uin = 230 VAC Ambient temperature Surface temperature < 200 A 50 ms -25 C to +55 C Module top, center Max. 96 C Storage temperature -40 C to +85 C Self-heating on full-load max. 45 K Interference immunity ESD HF fields Burst Surge HF injection Mains quality test EN 61000-4-2, 4-3 up to 4-6, 4-11 Cooler Air discharge: 15 kV 10 V/m symmetrical: 2 Symmetrical: 1 10 Vrms Free convection Dimensions L x W x H 175 mm x 85 mm x 35 mm Weight 720 g Housing / casting UL 94-V0 Power supply class according to CSA Degree of protection IP 65 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Level 3 271 Accessories 10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems Table 10- 2 Technical specifications for the input Rated input voltage Uin EN 60950 / UL 60950 100 to 240 V AC 120 to 353 V DC Input voltage range Uin 94 to 264 V AC 120 to 375 V DC (UL: 353 VDC) Input frequency fin 50/60 Hz Radio interference level EN 55011/B Switching frequency fsw approx. 70 kHz typ. Length of cable 2m Table 10- 3 Technical specifications of the output Output voltage tolerance Uout Uin = 230 VAC Uout nom +2 %/-1 % Overvoltage protection Uout nom +20 % typ. Noise ULF Uin = min., BW: 1 MHz 1 % Uout Noise UHF Uin = min., BW: 20 MHz 2 % Uout Line Regulation Load Regulation Uin = min./max. Iout = 10...90...10 % 1,0 % 1,0 % Short-circuit current Imax Inom = 4 A (+50C) 105 up to 130 % Inom Settling time tR load variations Iout = 10...90...10 % < 5 ms Temperature coefficient TA = -25 C to +70 C 0.01 %/K Overload behavior Pover Constant current Short-circuit protection/ No-load response Continuous/no-load stability Derating TA > +50 C to +70 C max. 2 %/K Connector type Flanged connector 4 pins Binder, Order No.: 09-3431-90-04 Table 10- 4 Input 272 Output configurations Outputs U1 = U2 ILoad = I1 + I2 110 V AC 24 V DC 0A 110 V AC 24 V DC 3A 220 V AC 24 V DC 0A 220 V AC 24 V DC 3A Efficiency (%) Remarks No-load stability 88 No-load stability 90 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Accessories 10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems Table 10- 5 Compliance with standards Designation Standard Values Electrical safety EN 60950 / UL 60950 / CAN/CSA 22.2 950, 3 Edition Conducted interference EN 61000-6-3 EN 55011 Class B Emission EN 61000-6-3 EN 55011 Class B All values are measured at full-load and at an ambient temperature of 25 C (unless specified otherwise). 10.1.7 Pin assignment of DC outputs and mains connection DC outputs Assignment (1) Ground (0V) (2) +24 V DC (3) +24 V DC (4) Ground (0V) Mains connection Assignment (1) 100 to 240 V AC (2) n.c. (3) 100 to 240 V AC (4) n.c. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 273 Accessories 10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems Dimension drawing 10.1.8 s s s Units of measurement: All dimensions in mm 274 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Accessories 10.1 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems 10.1.9 Certificates and approvals Table 10- 6 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems 6GT2898-0AA00 - Europe, 6GT2898-0AA10 - UK Certificate Description CE approval to 2004/108/EC EMC 73/23/EEC LVD Table 10- 7 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems 6GT2898-0AA20 - USA Standard This product is UL-certified for the US and Canada. It meets the following safety standards: UL 60950-1 - Information Technology Equipment Safety - Part 1: General Requirements CSA C22.2 No. 60950 -1 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment UL Report E 205089 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 275 Accessories 10.2 Mobile handheld terminals 10.2 Mobile handheld terminals SIMATIC RF310M mobile handheld terminal Suitable for all ISO versions of MDS D1xx, MDS D2xx, MDS D 3xx, MDS D4xx. (Does not apply for MDS D139/MDS D160 with MLFBs 6GT2600-0AA00/6GT2600-0AB00). For detailed information on the device, see SIMATIC RF310M Operating Instructions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26009421). MOBY STG Handheld Terminal PRO Suitable for all MDS D1xx, MDS D2xx, MDS D3xx (not MDS D4XX).. No programming library available. For more detailed information on the device, see MOBY STG Handheld Terminal PRO Operating Instructions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26116402/0/en). 276 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Accessories 10.3 MOBY antenna distributor 10.3 MOBY antenna distributor Application area The MOBY antenna distributor is a power distributor with electrical isolation between the input (IN) and the two outputs (OUT1, OUT2). At the operating frequency of 13.56 MHz, the impedance at all inputs and outputs is 50 Ohm. The device is used to connect 2, 3 or 4 MOBY D antennas to one SLG D10/D10S write/read device. Gate, C and tunnel arrangements are therefore possible (see configuration possibilities). Figure 10-1 MOBY antenna distributor Table 10- 8 Ordering data for MOBY antenna distributor Ordering data Order No. Antenna duplexer (1 antenna cable included in scope of supply) 6GT2690-0AC00 Accessories: Antenna cable, length 3.3 m 6GT2691-0CH33 Antenna cable, length 10.5 m 6GT2691-0CN10 Antenna extension, length 7.2 m 6GT2691-0DH72 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 277 Accessories 10.3 MOBY antenna distributor Technical data Table 10- 9 278 Technical data for MOBY D antenna distributor Max. input power 10 W Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Power supply None Enclosure dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 160 x 80 x 40 (without connector) Color Anthracite Material Plastic PA 12 Connector (inputs and outputs) TNC connector Mounting 2 x M5 screws Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage MTBF 3.0 x 10 5 hours Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (UL: for indoor use only) Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum Type II 30 g Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/ 1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) Weight, approx. 400 g Approval CE UL -25 C to +65 C -25 C to +75 C MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Alarm, error and system messages 11 In this chapter, you will find a list of the MOBY D error messages. The messages are subdivided into two groups: Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing) Error messages and causes for MOBY D in combination with the MDWAPI library MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 279 Alarm, error and system messages 11.1 Error messages and causes for MOBY D in combination with the MDWAPI library 11.1 Error messages and causes for MOBY D in combination with the MDWAPI library Table 11- 1 General errors Error code in HEX Cause, remedy 0x00 OK: Data/parameters read or saved without errors Control command executed Table 11- 2 Transponder status Error code in HEX Cause, remedy 0x01 No transponder: No transponder within the detection field of the reader Transponder in detection field has been switched to silent Error in communication between reader and transponder. The reader can no longer detect the transponder. 0x02 Invalid data: CRC16 checksum error in the received data 0x03 Write error: Plausibility test of written data failed: Attempt to write to a read-only area Distance between transponder and read antenna too large Attempt to write during excessive ambient noise 0x04 Address error: The requested data lie beyond the logical or physical address range of the transponder: The addresses lie outside the maximum address range of the transponder The addresses lie outside the configured address range of the transponder 0x05 Invalid transponder type: This command is not supported by this transponder: Write or read attempt with a transponder A specific command is not supported by the transponder. 0x06 Read error: Plausibility test of read data failed: Distance between transponder and read antenna too large Attempt to read during excessive ambient noise 280 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Alarm, error and system messages 11.1 Error messages and causes for MOBY D in combination with the MDWAPI library Table 11- 3 Parameter status Error code in HEX Cause, remedy 0x10 EEPROM error: EEPROM of the reader cannot be write-accessed Before the write procedure in the EEPROM, a faulty parameter checksum occurred. 0x11 Parameter outside the valid range: Valid parameter range exceeded. Table 11- 4 Interface status Error code in HEX Cause, remedy 0x80 Unknown command: Selected function not supported by reader 0x81 Length error: Protocol is too long or too short 0x82 Command is not possible: 0x83 HF communication error: An error occurred in the communication between the transponder and reader. Possible causes: Algorithm for collision handling was not performed until no more collisions were detected. Reason for interruption: - Timeout during communication with the host 0x94 Other data: More transponder data records have been requested than the transponder protocol is capable of transferring simultaneously. 0x95 ISO error: Additional error code for ISO transponder was sent with the response data MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 281 Alarm, error and system messages 11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing) Table 11- 5 Error codes for ISO transponders Error code in HEX Explanation of error codes in the transponder response 0x01 Command not supported (the request code was not recognized) 0x02 Command not recognized (e.g. due to a format error) 0x03 Option not supported 0x0F Unknown error 0x10 Specified block does not exist 0x11 Specified block is already disabled and cannot be disabled again 0x12 Specified block is disabled, its contents cannot be changed 0x13 Unsuccessful attempt to program the specified block 0x14 Unsuccessful attempt to disable the specified block 0xA0 0xDF Error codes for user-specific commands All others Reserved for future use 11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing) 11.2.1 General errors Automation system switches to STOP OB 86 not programmed and a slave has failed. OB 122 not programmed and a slave has failed. The error does not occur until FC/FB 45 is called. The pointer Params_DB, command_DB or DAT_DB does not exist or is pointing to a nonexistent address area. 282 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Alarm, error and system messages 11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing) 11.2.2 Error messages An error condition exists in FC/FB 45 whenever the "Error" variable is enabled on a channel. If this is the case, the exact cause of the error can be determined from variable "error_MOBY", "error_FC" or "error_BUS". Table 11- 6 Classification of error messages Error variable Classification error_MOBY This error was reported by the MOBY-ASM / write/read device. There are two main reasons for this: Communication between ASM and write/read device or between write/read device and MDS is faulty. The ASM/SLG is unable to process the command. Error_MOBY is indicated on the ASM on the ERR LED with an appropriate flashing pattern. error_FC This error is signaled by FC/FB 45. Main cause There is a parameter error in "Params_DB" or "command_DB". error_BUS The transport layer of PROFIBUS DP is signaling an error. A PROFIBUS DP tracer and a PROFIBUS DP tester (BT 200; Order No. 6ES7 181-0AA000AA0) is an invaluable tool for accurate troubleshooting. The PROFIBUS DP system diagnostics can provide further information about the cause of the error. The error shown here is reported by the SFC 58/59 system function in the RET_VAL parameter. For a detailed description of the RET_VAL parameter, please refer to the SIMATIC S7 system manuals (see System software for S7-300/400). Note When several errors occur with chained commands, the "error variable" always indicates the first error detected. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 283 Alarm, error and system messages 11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing) error_MOBY Table 11- 7 Error messages of the MOBY ASM/SLG via the "error_MOBY" variable Error code in Flashing of HEX ERR LED Cause, remedy 00 - No error; result is OK - 1x See error code 0F 01 2x Presence error: MDS has moved out of the transmission window of the SLG. The MOBY command was executed only partially. Read command: No data are transmitted to FC/FB 45. Write command: The data storage unit which just left the field contains an incomplete data record. Distance between SLG and MDS not adhered to Configuration error: The data block to be processed is too large (in dynamic mode) The next command (READ, WRITE) will be automatically executed on the next MDS. Note: The error indication on the red LEDs on the front panel indicates error code 02 in this case. 02 2x Presence error: A mobile data storage unit has passed by an SLG without being processed by a command. Note: The error indicatioin on the red error LEDs does not distinguish between Error 01 and Error 02 (see error code 01). 03 3x 04 4x Error in the connection to the SLG Supply voltage for the ASM is less than 20 V or not connected 24 V voltage has voltage dips, is not connected or is switched off Fuse on the ASM has blown. Check the wiring Cable between ASM and SLG is wired incorrectly or cable break. Hardware defect: ASM or SLG Interference coupling on SLG cable or bus cable Perform init_run after error correction. Error in MDS's memory The data storage unit has never been write-accessed or has lost the contents of its memory due to battery failure. Initialize data storage unit with the STG With the SLG: Call initialization command Check MDS battery or change MDS Data storage unit is defective 05 5x Unknown command Unknown command code in Byte 2 of the message frame SLG signals data length error (check message frame) Faulty length of useful data 284 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Alarm, error and system messages 11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing) Error code in Flashing of HEX ERR LED Cause, remedy 06 Field interference on SLG The SLG is receiving interference from its environment. MDS has left the field during communication. Communication between SLG and MDS has been interrupted by external interference. The distance between two write/read devices is too small and does not correspond to the configuration guidelines 6x Antenna error Antenna is unscrewed 0A 10x Only during initialization: MDS is unable to perform the initialization command. MDS is defective. 0B 11x Memory of MDS cannot be read correctly. 0C 12x Memory of the MDS cannot be write-accessed. Memory of the MDS is defective. 0D 13x Address error (address range overshoot) Specified address does not exist on MDS The command must be checked and corrected when the message frame is created The MDS is not the right type. 0F 15x Start message This message is output by the ASM after every start. (A start occurs after connection of the operating voltage, after operating the front switch, after a rest via the X1 connector or following a bus error.) The start message remains active until the user issues a RESET command to the ASM. This enables the user to detect reconnection to the power supply (and therefore operational readiness) on the ASM. Execute an init_run 10 16x NEXT command is not possible. SLG does not recognize NEXT command. 11 17x Short-circuit or overloading of 24 V outputs Next command must be a RESET command. The affected output is turned off. All 24 V outputs are turned off when total overload occurs. A reset can only be performed by turning the power supply off and on again. Then start init_run. 12 18x Internal ASM communication error Connector contact problem on the ASM (send in ASM for repairs) ASM hardware defect Electromagnetic interference Start init_run command after error correction. 13 19x ASM/SLG does not have enough buffer to store the command intermediately. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 285 Alarm, error and system messages 11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing) Error code in Flashing of HEX ERR LED Cause, remedy 14 20x Internal ASM error or SLG error (watchdog) Program sequence error on the ASM Switch 24 V supply off and on again Program sequence error on the SLG Start init_run command after error correction. 15 21x Wrong parameterization of the ASM/SLG Check INPUT parameters in UDT 10. RESET command is parameterized incorrectly. After a start-up, the ASM has still not received an init_run. 16 22x The command cannot be processed with the current bus configuration. Input or output areas too small for the specified message frame length. Was the correct GSD file used? Write or read command issued with length specification too large. Data length > 233 bytes. Change the configuration of the bus in the master module 17 23x Communication error between FC/FB 45 and MOBY-ASM. Handshake error Params_DB (UDT 10) of this ASM station is being overwritten by other parts of the program. Check parameters of MOBY ASM in UDT 10 Check FC/FB 45 command which caused this error Start init_run command after error correction. 18 24x An error has occurred which must be acknowledged with an init_run. A temporary short circuit has occurred on PROFIBUS DP. The RESET command is faulty. Start init_run command after error correction. 19 25x Previous command is active or buffer overflow. The user sent a new command to the ASM/SLG even though the last command was still active. Active command can only be terminated with an init_run. Before a new command can be started the READY bit must be 1 (exception: init_run). Two FC/FB 45 calls were parameterized with the same parameters ("ASM_address" and "ASM_channel") Two FC/FB 45 calls are using the same Params_DB pointer Start init_run command after error correction. When command repetition (e.g., fixed code MDS) is used, no data are fetched from the MDS. The data buffer on the ASM has overflowed. MDS data have been lost. 286 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Alarm, error and system messages 11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing) Error code in Flashing of HEX ERR LED Cause, remedy 1A PROFIBUS DP error occurred The PROFIBUS DP bus connection was interrupted - Wire break on the bus - Bus connector on ASM was removed briefly PROFIBUS DP master doesn't address ASM anymore. Execute an init_run The ASM has detected a message frame interruption on the bus. The PROFIBUS DP may have been reconfigured (e.g. with HW Config). 26x This error is only indicated when access monitoring has been enabled in the PROFIBUS DP configuration. 1C 28x The antenna of the SLG is switched off/on and should be switched on/off again. The antenna is switched off and in this state, an MDS command should be executed. The antenna should be switched off, even though one MDS command is active. The antenna is already switched off. The antenna is already switched on. Unknown mode in SET ANT command. The antenna cannot be switched off, because an MDS command is still active. The antenna is switched off, so the MDS command cannot be executed. 1D 29x More MDSes are in the transmission window than the SLG is capable of processing simultaneously. Only one MDS can be processed at a time with FC/FB 45 1E 30x Error when processing the function The data in UDT 10 are invalid; check UDT 10 and execute init_run ASM hardware is defective: ASM receives wrong data during init_run. AB byte does not comply with the useful data length. 1F 31x Running command canceled by RESET (init_run or cancel) or bus connector removed Communication with the MDS was terminated by init_run. This error can only be reported on init_run or cancel MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 287 Alarm, error and system messages 11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing) error_FC Table 11- 8 Error variable "error_FC" Error code (B#16#..) Description 00 No error; default value if everything is ok. 01 Params_DB not available in SIMATIC 02 Params_DB too small UDT 10/11 was not used during definition Params_DB must be 300 bytes in length (for each channel) Check that Params_DB and Params_ADDR are correct 03 The DB after the "command_DB_number" pointer is not available in the SIMATIC. 04 "command_DB" in the SIMATIC too small UDT 20/21 was not used during command definition The last command in "command_DB" is a chained command; reset the chaining bit 05 Invalid command type. Check command pointer command_DB_number/command_DB_address Check the current values in command_DB - Execute an init_run 06 Unexpected acknowledgement received. The parameters of the command and acknowledgement message frames do not match (command, length, address_MDS). The user changed the command_DB_number/_address pointer during command execution. The user changed the command parameters in the MOBY CMD data block (UDT 20) during command execution. Check the ASM_address and ASM_channel parameter settings. ASM_address and ASM_channel have the same parameters for different channels. The acknowledgement counter and command counter between the ASM and FC/FB are no longer synchronized - Execute an init_run 07 The MOBY_mode or MDS_control parameter (defined in UDT 10) has an invalid value 08 A bus error has occurred which is reported by system functions SFC 58/59. More information on this error is available in the error_BUS variable. ASM_address or ASM_channel not available Execute an init_run 09 The ASM has failed. Power failure on MOBY-ASM PROFIBUS DP connector removed or PROFIBUS DP cable interrupted ASM_address or ASM_channel not available This error is indicated if the ASM_failure bit was set in OB 122. OB 122 is called if FC/FB 45 can no longer access the cyclic word for MOBY-ASM. 288 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Alarm, error and system messages 11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing) Error code (B#16#..) Description 0A Another init_run was started without waiting for ready during execution of the init_run command Do not set init_run cyclically The same physical ASM channel is used in two (or more) UDT 10 structures. Check ASM_address and ASM_channel in all UDT 10 structures. 0B init_run cannot be executed; cyclic Process image for ASM is faulty; FC/FB 45 signals timeout of process image to ASM This error can be deactivated by writing the value #00 to address DBB 58 in UDT 10. In certain error situations, FC/FB 45 will then, however, not generate an error message and "seize up". ASM_address in UDT 10 is parameterized incorrectly. ASM_address may be for wrong module. ASM_channel setting is 16 or 0 ASM hardware/firmware is faulty. The same physical ASM channel is used in two (or more) UDT 10 structures. Check ASM_address and ASM_channel in all UDT 10 structures. 0C Area length error on block move for FC/FB 45. DAT_DB does not exist or is too small. Check DAT_DB_number and DAT_DB_address in UDT 20 Execute an init_run 0D An init_run was not completed correctly. The process image is not consistent. Run init_run again Turn ASM off and on again. The RUN/STOP switch on the CPU was pressed rapidly several times in succession (particularly with slow PROFIBUS DP baud rates) The same physical ASM channel is used in two (or more) UDT 10 structures. Check ASM_address and ASM_channel in all UDT 10 structures. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 289 Alarm, error and system messages 11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing) error_BUS Table 11- 9 Error code (W#16#...) Description 800A ASM is not ready (temporary message). This message is given to a user who is not using FC/FB 45 and is polling the ASMs acyclically, one after the other, very quickly. 8x7F Internal error on parameter x. Cannot be remedied by the user. 8x22 8x23 Area length error on reading parameter. Area length error on writing parameter. This error code indicates that parameter x is partially or completely outside the operand area or the length of a bit array for an ANY parameter is not divisible by 8. 8x24 8x25 Area error on reading parameter. Area error on writing parameter. This error code indicates that parameter x is within an area not allowed for the system function. 8x26 Parameter contains a time cell number which is too high. 8x27 Parameter contains a counter cell number which is too high. 8x28 8x29 Alignment error on reading parameter. Alignment error on writing parameter. The reference to parameter x is an operand whose bit address is not equal to 0. 8x30 8x31 The parameter is located within the write-protected global DB. The parameter is located within the write-protected instance DB. 8x32 8x34 8x35 The parameter contains a DB number which is too high. The parameter contains an FC number which is too high. The parameter contains an FB number which is too high. 8x3A 8x3C 8x3E The parameter contains a DB number which is not loaded. The parameter contains an FC number which is not loaded. The parameter contains an FB number which is not loaded. 8x42 An access error occurred while the system was attempting to read a parameter from the I/O area of the inputs. An access error occurred while the system was attempting to write a parameter to the I/O area of the outputs. 8x43 290 Error variable "error_BUS" 8x44 8x45 Error on nth (n > 1) read access after an error occurred. Error on nth (n > 1) write access after an error occurred. 8090 Specified logical base address is invalid: There is no assignment in the SDB1/SDB2x, or it is not a base address. 8092 A type other than BYTE has been specified in an ANY reference. 8093 The area identifier contained in the configuration (SDB1, SDB2x) of the logical address is not permitted for these SFCs. The following are permitted: 0 = S7-400 1 = S7-300 2, 7 = DP modules MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Alarm, error and system messages 11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing) Error code (W#16#...) Description 80A0 Negative acknowledgment while reading from module. FC/FB fetches acknowledgment although no acknowledgment is ready. A user who is not using the FC/FB 45 would like to fetch DS 101 (or DS 102 to 104) although no acknowledgment is available. Perform an init_run for new synchronization between ASM and application. 80A1 Negative acknowledgment while writing to the module. FC/FB sends command although ASM is unable to receive a command. 80A2 DP protocol error in layer 2. Could be a hardware defect. 80A3 DP protocol error in Direct-Data-Link-Mapper or User-Interface/User. Could be a hardware defect. 80B0 80B1 The length specified in the RECORD parameter is wrong. SFC not possible for module type Data record unknown to module Data record number 241 is not allowed. Data records 0 and 1 are not permitted for SFC58 "WR_REC." 80B2 The configured slot is not occupied. 80B3 Actual module type is not the module type specified in SDB1. 80C0 RDREC: The module has record, but it doesn't have any read data. WRREC: ASM is not ready to receive new data - Wait until the cyclic counter has been incremented 80C1 The data of the preceding write job on the module for the same data record have not yet been processed by the module. 80C2 The module is currently processing the maximum possible number of jobs for a CPU. 80C3 Required resources (memory, etc.) are currently in use. This error is not reported by the FC/FB 45. If this error occurs, the FC/FB 45 waits until the system is able to provide resources again. 80C4 Communication error Parity error SW ready not set Error in block length management Checksum error on CPU side Checksum error on module side 80C5 Distributed I/O not available MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 291 Alarm, error and system messages 11.2 Error messages and causes for MOBY D with ASM and FC/FB 45 (direct MDS addressing) 292 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Troubleshooting/FAQ 12 What shall I do when nothing works? 1. Check the supply voltage directly on the SLG connector with a voltmeter. 2. Check the cables to the computer - Do the SLG and the computer have the same physical interface? - Is the polarity of the connecting cable (RS 232) correct? (RxD of SLG must be connected to TxD of computer and vice-versa) - Is the cable shield connected correctly? Error messages More information on error messages can be found at MOBY D C/C++ MDWAPI Programming Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/12429971). The range of the SLG is too small When the range of the SLG is too small, you must check Power supply unit/switched-mode power supply (see the Section Planning the MOBY D system regarding interference) Whether monitors or other sources of interference are nearby (see the Section Planning the MOBY D system) Whether metal is in the immediate vicinity (see the Section Planning the MOBY D system) To achieve optimal write/read distances with ANT D5, a metal plate is required at a distance of 100 mm (see the Section Planning the MOBY D system) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 293 Troubleshooting/FAQ 294 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 A Certificates and approvals Certificate Description CE Approval to R&TTE Notes on CE marking The following applies to the system described in this documentation: The CE marking on a device is indicative of the corresponding approval: DIN ISO 9001 certificate The quality assurance system for the entire product process (development, production, and marketing) at Siemens fulfills the requirements of ISO 9001 (corresponds to EN29001: 1987). This has been certified by DQS (the German society for the certification of quality management systems). EQ-Net certificate no.: 1323-01 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 295 Certificates and approvals Certificates for USA and Canada Safety One of the following markings on a device is indicative of the corresponding approval: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) per UL 60950 (I.T.E) or per UL 508 (IND.CONT.EQ) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) according to Canadian standard C22.2 No. 60950 (I.T.E) or C22.2 No. 142 (IND.CONT.EQ) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) according to standard UL 60950, Report E11 5352 and Canadian standard C22.2 No. 60950 (I.T.E) or UL508 and C22.2 No. 142 (IND.CONT.EQ) UL recognition mark Canadian Standard Association (CSA) per Standard C22.2. No. 60950 (LR 81690) or per C22.2 No. 142 (LR 63533) Canadian Standard Association (CSA) per American Standard UL 60950 (LR 81690) or per UL 508 (LR 63533) 296 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Certificates and approvals EMC USA Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Shielded Cables Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with FCC regulations. Modifications Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Conditions of Operations This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CANADA Canadian Notice MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. 297 Certificates and approvals 298 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Service & Support B Contact partner If you have any further questions on the use of our products, please contact one of our representatives at your local Siemens office. The addresses are found on the following pages: On the Internet (www.siemens.com/automation/partner) In Catalog CA 01 In Catalog FS 10 specially for factory automation sensors Technical Support You can access technical support for all IA/DT projects via the following: Phone: + 49 (0) 180 5050 222 ( 0.14 /min. from the German landline network, deviating mobile communications prices are possible) E-mail (mailto:support.automation@siemens.com) Internet: Online support request form: (www.siemens.com/automation/support-request) Service & support for industrial automation and drive technologies You can find various services on the Support homepage (www.siemens.com/automation/service&support) of IA/DT on the Internet. There you will find the following information, for example: Our newsletter containing up-to-date information on your products. Relevant documentation for your application, which you can access via the search function in "Product Support". A forum for global information exchange by users and specialists. Your local contact for IA/DT on site. Information about on-site service, repairs, and spare parts. Much more can be found under "Our service offer". RFID homepage For general information about our identification systems, visit RFID homepage (www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/rf). MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 299 Service & Support Technical documentation on the Internet A guide to the technical documentation for the various products and systems is available on the Internet: SIMATIC Guide manuals (www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal) Online catalog and ordering system The online catalog and the online ordering system can also be found on the Industry Mall Homepage (http://www.siemens.com/industrymall). Training center We offer appropriate courses to get you started. Please contact your local training center or the central training center in D-90327 Nuremberg. Phone: +49 (0) 180 523 56 11 ( 0.14 /min. from the German landline network, deviating mobile communications prices are possible) For information about courses, see the SITRAIN homepage (www.sitrain.com). 300 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 C Previous versions C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB C.1.1 Compatibility list The mobile data storage units listed below are replaced by compatible successor products. The product name does not change, however, the successor products have a new order number as listed in the table below. These type designations can also be found on the type plates of the components. You can use this table to find replacements especially in the case of types that are no longer available. Transponder Order No. of previous MDS version Order No. of replacement type MDS D100 6GT2600-0AD00 6GT2600-0AD10 MDS D124 6GT2600-0AC00 6GT2600-0AC10 MDS D139 6GT2600-0AA00 6GT2600-0AA10 MDS D160 6GT2600 0AB00 6GT2600 0AB10 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 301 Previous versions C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB C.1.2 MDS D124 (MLFB 6GT2600-0AC00) Application area The MDS D124 is a passive, maintenance-free transponder based on the ISO 15693 standard with I-Code technology. It was designed for applications in production and distribution logistics as well as product identification. This mobile data storage unit can also be used in a harsh environment under extreme environmental conditions (e.g. extreme temperatures). Figure C-1 MDS D124 Table C- 1 Ordering data for MDS D124 Ordering data Order no. Mobile data storage unit MDS D124 Button, 112 byte EEPROM user memory 302 6GT2600-0AC00 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB Technical data Table C- 2 Technical data for MDS D124 Memory size 128 bytes Memory configuration Serial number Configuration memory AFI/DSFID Application memory Storage technology EEPROM Memory organization See the Section Mobile data storage units - Listing to ISO 15693 Data contents (at +40C) 10 years MTBF (at +40 C) 1.5 x 106 hours Data transmission rate Read Writing Read cycles Unlimited Write cycles, typical 1 000 000 Write cycles, min. 200 000 Write/read distance (Sg) See the Section Field data Distance from metal min. 25 mm (approx. 30 % reduction of the field data) Multitag capability Yes Anti-collision speed approx. 20 transponders/s simultaneously identifiable Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery) Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP67 Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3 total shock response spectrum, Type II 100 g Vibration-resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3 20 g Torsion and bending load Not permissible Dimensions (D x H) in mm 27 x 4 Color Black 8-byte (fixed code) 6 bytes 2 bytes 112 bytes Introduction approx. 3,5 ms/byte approx. 9.5 ms/byte Material Epoxy casting resin Mounting technique Adhesive, M3 screw Tightening torque at +20 C 1 Nm (at high temperatures, the expansion coefficients of the materials used must be taken into account) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 303 Previous versions C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage Weight, approx. 5g -25 to +125C -40 to +150C Field data Table C- 3 Field data of MDS D124 SLG D10/D10S ANT D5 SLG D10/D10S ANT D6 SLG D10/D10S ANT D10 SLG D11/D11S ANT D5 SLG D12/ SLG D12S Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 130 mm 0 to 130 mm 0 to 130 mm 0 to 70 mm 0 to 50 mm Limit distance (Sg) 180 mm 180 mm 180 mm 110 mm 70 mm Transmission window (L) O 320 mm 440 mm 980 mm O 300 mm 120 mm Transmission window (W) 128 mm 340 mm 380 mm 120 mm 48 mm Minimum distance from MDS to MDS 1.2 m 1.8 m 0.8 m 0.3 m 0.8 m Dimensions (in mm) s s Figure C-2 304 Dimensions of MDS D124 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB Metal-free area K!PP 'DWDPHPRU\ 0HWDO 1RQPHWDO Figure C-3 Metal-free area for MDS D124 Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M3 countersunk head screws). This has no tangible impact on the range. When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Section Planning the MOBY D system. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 305 Previous versions C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB C.1.3 MDS D139 (MLFB 6GT2600-0AA00) Application area These reusable, cyclic heat-proof transponders with a limited service life are required for use in production logistics and in assembly lines subject to high temperatures (up to +200 C). The MDS D139 is a passive, maintenance-free transponder with 44 bytes of user memory. This data storage unit is considerably less expensive than the heat-proof mobile data storage units available today due to its simple construction (without thermal insulation), but also due to its lack of complexity. Figure C-4 MDS D139 Table C- 4 Ordering data for MDS D139 Ordering data Order No. Mobile data storage units MDS D139 6GT2600-0AA00 Heat-proof (r/w) up to +200 C / +220 C with 44 bytes user memory Accessories: Spacers 306 6GT2690-0AA00 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB Technical data Table C- 5 Technical data for MDS D139 Memory size 64 bytes Memory configuration Serial number Configuration memory Family code/application UID Application memory Storage technology EEPROM Memory organization See the Section Mobile data storage units - Data retention 10 years MTBF 2 x 10 6 hours Read cycles Unlimited Write cycles at + 40 C, typical at + 70 C, min. Write/read distance (Sg) See Field data Distance from metal min. 30 mm (approx. 30 % reduction of the field data) Multitag capability Yes Power supply Inductive power transmission (without battery) 8 bytes (fixed code) 8 bytes 4 bytes 44 bytes Introduction 500 000 10 000 Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP68 Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3 Total shock response spectrum, Type II 50 g Vibration-resistant according to EN 607213-7, Class 7M3 20 g Torsion and bending load Not permissible Enclosure dimensions (D x H) in mm 85 x 15 Color Black Material Plastic PPS Mounting 1 x M5 screw 1 Tightening torque 1.5 Nm 2 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 307 Previous versions C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB Ambient temperature Operation permanent -25 C to +100 C +140 C +200 C 3 +220 20% reduction in the limit distance Tested up to 4,000 hours or 1,500 cycles Tested up to 2000 hours or 500 cycles -40 C to +100 C Transport and storage Weight, approx. C 50 g 1) To prevent damage to the MDS at high temperature (depending on the expansion coefficients), an M5 stainless steel screw must be used to attach it to the spacer (6GT2690-0AA00). 2) At higher temperatures (>+80 C), the expansion coefficients of all materials must be observed 3) At temperatures of +140 C and above, processing is not possible Field data Table C- 6 Field data for MDS D139 SLG D10/D10S ANT D5 SLG D10/D10S ANT D6 SLG D10/D10S ANT D10 SLG D11/D11S ANT D5 SLG D12/ SLG D12S Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 380 mm 0 to 480 mm 0 to 380 mm 0 to 240 mm 0 to 120 mm Limit distance (Sg) 450 mm 550 mm 450 mm 300 mm 150 mm Transmission window (L) O 320 mm 520 mm 1000 mm O 300 mm 120 mm Transmission window (W) 128 mm 420 mm 400 mm 120 mm 48 mm Minimum distance from MDS to MDS 1.5 m 2m 1m 0.5 m 1m ATEX The MDS D139 mobile data memory is classed as a piece of simple, electrical equipment and can be operated in the Category 2G protection zone. 308 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB s s s s s Dimensions (in mm) s Figure C-5 Dimensions of MDS D139 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 309 Previous versions C.1 Previous MDS version with different MLFB Metal-free area 0RXQWLQJRQPHWDO 'DWDVWRUDJH XQLW 0HWDO 6SDFHU KPP PP )OXVKPRXQWLQJRIWKH0'6LQPHWDOLVQRWSHUPLWWHG Figure C-6 Metal-free area for MDS D139 5HWDLQLQJEROW 0'6' 6SDFHU Figure C-7 MDS D139: Mounting with a spacer Note If the minimum guide values (h) are not observed, a reduction of the field data results. It is possible to mount the MDS with metal screws (M5). This has no tangible impact on the range. It is recommended that a test is performed in critical applications. When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Section Planning the MOBY D system. 310 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 C.2.1 Compatibility list The write/read devices with antennas listed below will no longer be available as package. Only the individual components can be ordered. The write/read devices can be used compatibly as individual components and their previous properties have not changed. The product name does not change, the individual SLGs are, however, still available as basic device with the same order numbers Write/read device with ANT D5 C.2.2 Order No. (discontinued) Order No. of replacement type Basic unit Antenna ANT D5 6GT2698-5AA00 SLG D10 ANT D5 6GT2601-0AA00 6GT2698-1AA00 SLG D11 ANT D5 6GT2601-0AC00 6GT2698-1AC00 SLG D10S ANT D5 6GT2602-0AA00 6GT2698-2AA00 SLG D11S ANT D5 6GT2602-0AC00 6GT2698-2AC00 SLG D10 ANT D5 (MLFB 6GT2601-0AA00) Application area SLG D10 ANT D5 is a write/read device in the high-end performance range with a serial interface and a separate antenna which has been specially designed for warehouses, logistics and distribution. It is designed for a range of up to 480 mm. The write/read device is equipped with a serial RS 232 interface (RS 422 interface on request) which supports communication with the PC or non-Siemens PLCs. For fast and easy programming, a C library is available to the user that supports the use of Windows 9x, 2000, NT and XP. SLG D10 ANT D5 has multitag capability. Figure C-8 Write/read device SLG D10 ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 311 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Ordering data Table C- 7 Ordering data for SLG D10 ANT D5 Product Order No. Write/read device SLG D10 ANT D5 6GT2601-0AA00 With RS 232 serial interface for standard PC, with separate antenna Accessories: Spacer kit for ANT D5 6GT2690-0AB00 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (100 - 240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m connecting cable and country-specific plug. EU UK US Cables and connectors 312 6GT2898-0AA00 6GT2898-0AA10 6GT2898-0AA20 See the Section Planning the MOBY D system MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Technical data Table C- 8 Technical data for SLG D10 ANT D5 Inductive interface to the MDS Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Transponders supported Transponders to ISO 15693 and I-Code1 Serial interface to the user RS 232 (RS 422 on request) Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit Data transmission rate 9600 baud to 115.2 Kbaud (adjustable) Data backup CRC 16 Transmit power 4W Write/read distances SLG - MDS 480 mm typically (see field data)1 Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS, access rights, multitag Programming Windows 9x, 2000, NT and XP with 32 bit DLL available Multitag Yes Anti-collision speed approx. 20 labels/s simultaneously identifiable Power supply '&9s Current consumption Operation Inrush current, momentary 0.9 A 2.8 A/50 ms Cable length, SLG - PC With RS 232 30 m (depending on data transfer rate) Antenna cable length 3.60 m (included in scope of supply) Digital inputs/outputs None Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm For antenna For the electronics 340 x 325 x 38 320 x 145 x 100 without connector Color Antenna SLG housing Black Anthracite Material Antenna SLG housing Plastic ASA Aluminum Connectors Antenna (plugs into SLG) V24 interface Power Supply TNC connector 9-pin Sub-D connector (male) 4-pin M12 connector (male) SLG fixing 4 x M6 screws Antenna attachment 4 x M5 screws MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 313 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage -20 C to +55 C -25 C to +70 C MTBF SLG D10 ANT D5 7,5 x 10 4 hours 3.0 x 10 5 hours Degree of protection to EN 60529 SLG and antenna IP65 (UL: For indoor use only) Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, Type II 30 g Vibration compliant with EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/ 1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) 3500 g 1000 g CE FCC IC Harmless to heart pacemakers UL 60950 Weight, approx. SLG Antenna Approvals 1) In order to guarantee optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal. Note The antenna cable is permanently preassembled. Any modifications made to the cable will invalidate both the warranty and the CE approval. FCC information Siemens MOBY D SLG D10 FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD10 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 314 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 IC information The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. This device has been designed to operate with only the antennas as described in this manual. Use of further antennas is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Field data Table C- 9 Field data for SLG D10 ANT D5 Limit distance (Sg) max. 480 mm (dependent on transponder) Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 400 mm (dependent on transponder) Length of the transmission window (Ld) 320 mm Width of the transmission window (W) 128 mm Min. distance from ANT D5 to ANT D5 2m Transmission window /G 3ODQYLHZ 6DPLQ 6J 6DPD[ )RU6DPLQWKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZLVH[WHQGHG 6LGHYLHZ 7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ $17' 6D 6J PP 6SDFHUNLW 0HWDOSODWH Figure C-9 Transmission window for SLG D10 ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 315 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Metal-free area 0HWDO D D D D K PP QRQPHWDOVSDFHU D PP Figure C-10 Metal-free area for SLG D10 ANT D5 When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Sectoion Planning the MOBY D system. Definition of distance D ' ' 'LVWDQFH'P Figure C-11 316 Distance D: SLG D10 ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Dimensions (in mm) 9LQWHUIDFH $QWHQQD 3RZHU6XSSO\ PD[ PP [ )HUULWH 0LQLPXPEHQGLQJ UDGLXVPP &DEOHNLQNSURWHFWLRQ IOH[LEOHLQHYHU\GLUHFWLRQ &DEOHOHQJWKP 1RWH 7KH6/*PXVWEHJURXQGHGRQJURXQGLQJVFUHZ Figure C-12 Dimension drawing for SLG D10 ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 317 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Note In order to guarantee optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal. Spacer kit for MOBY D ANT D5 See the Section Write/read devices, SLG D10 basic unit 318 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 C.2.3 SLG D11 ANT D5 (MLFB 6GT2601-0AC00) Application area SLG D11 ANT D5 is a write/read device in the mid performance range with a serial interface and a separate antenna which has been specially designed for warehouses, logistics and distribution. It is designed for a range of up to 380 mm (depending on the label). The write/read device is equipped with a serial RS 232 interface which supports communication with the PC or non-Siemens PLCs. For fast and easy programming, a C library is available to the user that supports the use of Windows 9x, 2000, NT and XP. SLG D11 ANT D5 has multitag capability. Figure C-13 Write/read device SLG D11 ANT D5 Table C- 10 Ordering data for SLG D11 ANT D5 Ordering data Order no. SLG D11 ANT D5 write/read device basic unit with RS 232 serial interface for standard PC, with separate antenna 6GT2601-0AC00 Accessories: Spacer kit for ANT D5 6GT2690-0AB00 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (100 - 240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m connecting cable and country-specific plug. EU UK US Cables and connectors see Chapter Planning the MOBY D system MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 6GT2898-0AA00 6GT2898-0AA10 6GT2898-0AA20 319 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Technical data Table C- 11 Technical data for SLG D11 ANT D5 Inductive interface to the MDS 320 Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Transponders supported Transponders to ISO 15693 and I-Code1 Serial interface to the user RS 232 Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit Data transmission rate 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbaud (adjustable) Data backup CRC 16 Transmit power 1W Write/read distances SLG - MDS 380 mm typically (see field data)1 Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS, access rights, multitag Programming Windows 9x, 2000, NT and XP, with 32 bit DLL available Multitag Yes Anti-collision speed approx. 20 labels/s simultaneously identifiable Power supply Rated value Permitted range Current consumption Operation Inrush current, momentary 150 mA 600 mA Cable length, SLG - PC With RS 232 30 m '&9 '&99 '&9s8/RQO\ Antenna cable length 3.60 m Digital inputs/outputs None Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm For antenna For the electronics 340 x 325 x 38 160 x 80 x 40 without connector Color Antenna SLG housing Black Anthracite Material Antenna SLG housing Plastic ASA Plastic PA 12 Connectors Antenna (plugs into SLG) V24 interface Power Supply TNC connector 9-pin Sub-D connector (male) 4-pin M12 connector (male) SLG fixing 2 x M5 screws MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Antenna attachment 4 x M5 screws Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage -25 C to +55 C -25 C to +70 C MTBF SLG D11 ANT D5 2.0 x 105 hours 3.0 x 10 5 hours Degree of protection to EN 60529 SLG and antenna IP65 (UL: for indoor only) Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, Type II 30 g Vibration compliant with EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) Weight, approx. SLG Antenna Approvals 600 g 1000 g CE FCC IC Harmless to heart pacemakers UL 60950 1) In order to guarantee optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal. CAUTION The antenna cable is permanently preassembled. Any modifications made to the cable will invalidate both the warranty and the CE approval. Note The SLG D11 can process up to 4 MDSes with I-Code 1-Chip (e.g. MDS D139) in multitag mode! MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 321 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 FCC information Siemens MOBY D SLG D11 FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD11 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. IC information The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. This device has been designed to operate with only the antennas as described in this manual. Use of further antennas is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Field data Table C- 12 322 Field data for SLG D11 ANT D5 Limit distance (Sg) max. 380 mm (dependent on transponder) Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 300 mm (dependent on transponder) Length of the transmission window (Ld) 300 mm Width of the transmission window (W) 120 mm Min. distance from ANT D5 to ANT D5 2m MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Transmission window /G 3ODQYLHZ 6DPLQ 6J 6DPD[ )RU6DPLQWKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZLVH[WHQGHG 6LGHYLHZ 7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ $17' 6D 6J PP 6SDFHUNLW 0HWDOSODWH Figure C-14 Transmission window for SLG D11 ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 323 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Metal-free area 0HWDO D D D D K PP QRQPHWDOVSDFHU D PP Figure C-15 Metal-free area for SLG D11 ANT D5 When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Section Planning the MOBY D system. Definition of distance D ' ' 'LVWDQFH'P Figure C-16 324 Distance D: SLG D11 ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Dimensions (in mm) 9LHZ$ 3RZHU6XSSO\ 9LQWHUIDFH $ $ PD[ PP [ )HUULWH &DEOHNLQNSURWHFWLRQ IOH[LEOHLQHYHU\GLUHFWLRQ 0LQLPXPEHQGLQJ UDGLXVPP &DEOHOHQJWKP Figure C-17 Dimension drawing for SLG D11 ANT D5 Note In order to guarantee optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal. Spacer kit for MOBY D ANT D5 See the Section Write/read devices, SLG D10 basic unit MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 325 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 C.2.4 SLG D10S ANT D5 (6GT2602-0AA00) Application area SLG D10S ANT D5 is a write/read device in the high-end performance range with a serial interface and a separate antenna which has been specially designed for warehouses, logistics and distribution. It is designed for a range of up to 480 mm. The write/read device is equipped with a serial RS 422 interface that supports communication to SIMATIC S7 or PROFIBUS DP-V1 through the interface modules (ASM 452, ASM 456, ASM 473 and ASM 475). FC 45 is one method of quick and easy programming available to the user. With the high degree of protection (IP65) and the use of high-quality materials, the SLG D10S ANT D5 ensures problem-free operation under the harshest industrial conditions. Figure C-18 Write/read device SLG D10S ANT D5 Table C- 13 Ordering data for SLG D10S ANT D5 Ordering data Order No. Write/read device SLG D10S ANT D5 6GT2602-0AA00 With a serial RS 422 interface for connection to ASM 452, ASM 456, ASM 473 and ASM 475, with a remote antenna Accessories: Spacer kit for ANT D5 6GT2690-0AB00 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (100 - 240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m connecting cable and country-specific plug. EU UK US 24 V connecting cable, 5 m in length Cables and connectors 326 6GT2898-0AA00 6GT2898-0AA10 6GT2898-0AA20 6GT2491-1HH50 See the Section Planning the MOBY D system MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Technical data Table C- 14 Technical data for SLG D10S ANT D5 Inductive interface to the MDS Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Transponders supported Transponders according to ISO 15693 and ICode1 Serial interface to the user RS 422 Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit Data transmission rate 19.2 Kbaud to 115.2 Kbaud (depending on ASM) Data backup CRC 16 Transmit power 4W Write/read distances for SLG 450 mm typically (see field data)1 Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS The Repeat command is not permissible. A buffer of up to 256 bytes is available in the SLG for concatenating commands For one command, therefore, it is only possible to combine commands until the sum of the header and user data of the individual message frames does not exceed this value. FC 45 limits the user data length for each individual message frame to 233 bytes. Programming FC 45 Transmission protocol 3964R Multitag Available soon Power supply '&9s Current consumption Operation Inrush current, momentary 0.9 A 2.8 A/50 ms Cable length for SLG S7 With RS 422 300 m Antenna cable length 3.60 m (included in scope of supply) Digital inputs/outputs None Enclosure dimensions (L x W x H) in mm For antenna For the electronics 340 x 325 x 38 320 x 145 x 100 (without connector) Color Antenna SLG housing Black Anthracite Material Antenna SLG housing Plastic ASA Aluminum MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 327 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Connector Antenna (plugs into SLG) RS 422 interface Power supply SLG fixing 4 x M6 screws Antenna attachment 4 x M5 screws Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage -20 C to +55 C -25 C to +70 C MTBF SLG D10S ANT D5 7.5 x 10 4 hours 3.0 x 10 5 hours Degree of protection according to EN 60529 SLG and antenna IP65 (UL: for indoor use only) TNC connector 9-pin Sub-D connector (male) 4-pin M12 connector (male) Shock resistant according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum Type II 30 g Vibration according to EN 60721-3-7 Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/ 1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) Weight, approx. SLG Antenna Approvals 3500 g 1000 g CE FCC IC Harmless to heart pacemakers UL 60950 1) In order to ensure optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal. CAUTION The antenna cable is permanently preassembled. Any modifications made to the cable will invalidate both the warranty and the CE approval. Note After detaching the ANT D5 antenna from the SLG and connecting it again (by screwing), an init_run must always be performed. 328 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 FCC information Siemens MOBY D SLG D10S FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD10 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. IC information The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. This device has been designed to operate with only the antennas as described in this manual. Use of further antennas is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Field data Table C- 15 Field data for SLG D10S ANT D5 Limit distance (Sg) max. 480 mm (dependent on transponder) Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 400 mm (dependent on transponder) Length of the transmission window (Ld) 320 mm Width of transmission window (W) 128 mm Min. distance from ANT D5 to ANT D5 2m MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 329 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Transmission window /G 3ODQYLHZ 6DPLQ 6J 6DPD[ )RU6DPLQWKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZLVH[WHQGHG 6LGHYLHZ 7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ $17' 6D 6J PP 6SDFHUNLW 0HWDOSODWH Figure C-19 Transmission window for SLG D10S ANT D5 Metal-free area 0HWDO D D D D K PP QRQPHWDOVSDFHU D PP Figure C-20 330 Metal-free area for SLG D10S ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Section Planning the MOBY D system. Definition of distance D ' ' 'LVWDQFH'P Figure C-21 Distance D: SLG D10S ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 331 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Dimensions (in mm) 9LQWHUIDFH $QWHQQD 3RZHU6XSSO\ PD[ PP [ )HUULWH 0LQLPXPEHQGLQJ UDGLXVPP &DEOHNLQNSURWHFWLRQ IOH[LEOHLQHYHU\GLUHFWLRQ &DEOHOHQJWKP 1RWH 7KH6/*PXVWEHJURXQGHGRQJURXQGLQJVFUHZ Figure C-22 332 Dimension drawing for SLG D10S ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Note In order to guarantee optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal. Spacer kit for MOBY D ANT D5 See the Section Write/read devices, SLG D10 basic unit C.2.5 SLG D11S ANT D5 (6GT2602-0AC00) Application area SLG D11S ANT D5 is a write/read device in the mid performance range with a serial interface and a separate antenna which has been specially designed for warehouses, logistics and distribution. It is designed for a range of up to 380 mm (depending on the label). The write/read device is equipped with a serial RS 422 interface that supports communication to SIMATIC S7 or PROFIBUS DP-V1 through the interface modules (ASM 452, ASM 456, ASM 473 and ASM 475). FC 45 is one method of quick and easy programming available to the user. The rugged housing and high degree of protection (IP65) permit use even under the toughest industrial conditions. Figure C-23 Write/read device SLG D11S ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 333 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Ordering data Table C- 16 Ordering data for SLG D11S ANT D5 Order Write/read device SLG D11S ANT D5 6GT2602-0AC00 With a serial RS 422 interface for connection to ASM 452, ASM 456, ASM 473 and ASM 475, with a remote antenna Accessories: Spacer kit for ANT D5 6GT2690-0AB00 Wide-range power supply unit for SIMATIC RF systems (100 - 240 V AC / 24 V DC / 3 A) with 2 m connecting cable and country-specific plug. EU UK US 24 V connecting cable, 5 m in length Cables and connectors 334 6GT2898-0AA00 6GT2898-0AA10 6GT2898-0AA20 6GT 491-1HH50 See the Section Planning the MOBY D system MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Technical data Table C- 17 Technical data for SLG D11S ANT D5 Inductive interface to the MDS Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Transponders supported Transponders to ISO 15693 and I-Code1 Serial interface to the user RS 422 Transmission protocol Asynchronous 8 bit Data transmission rate 19.2 Kbaud Data backup CRC 16 Transmit power 1 W (reset parameter 04 hex) Write/read distances SLG - MDS 380 mm typically (see field data)1 Software functions Read, write and initialize MDS Concatenated commands are not permitted. The Repeat command is not implemented. The largest possible useful data length in a command is 233 bytes. Programming FC 45 Transmission protocol 3964R Multitag no Power supply Operation Permitted range Current consumption Operation Inrush current, momentary 150 mA 600 mA Cable length SLG - SIMATIC S7 With RS 422 300 m Antenna cable length 3.60 m (included in scope of supply) Digital inputs/outputs None Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm For antenna For the electronics 340 x 325 x 38 160 x 80 x 40 without connector Color Antenna SLG housing Black Anthracite Material Antenna SLG housing Plastic ASA Plastic PA 12 Connectors Antenna (plugs into SLG) RS-422 interface Power Supply TNC connector 9-pin Sub-D connector (male) 4-pin M12 connector (male) MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 '&9 '&99 '&9s8/RQO\ 335 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 SLG fixing 2 x M5 screws Antenna attachment 4 x M5 screws Ambient temperature Operation Transport and storage -25 to +55C -25 to +70C MTBF SLG D11S ANT D5 2.0 x 105 hours 3.0 x 10 5 hours Degree of protection to EN 60529 SLG and antenna IP65 (UL: For indoor use only) Shock resistant to EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, Type II 30 g Vibration compliant with EN 607213-7, Class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)/ 1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) Weight, approx. SLG Antenna 600 g 1000 g CE FCC IC Harmless to heart pacemakers UL 60950 Approvals 1) In order to guarantee optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal. FCC information Siemens MOBY D SLG D11S FCC ID: NXW-MOBYD-SLGD11 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 336 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 IC information The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. This device has been designed to operate with only the antennas as described in this manual. Use of further antennas is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Field data Table C- 18 Field data for SLG D11S ANT D5 Limit distance (Sg) max. 380 mm (dependent on transponder) Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 300 mm (dependent on transponder) Length of the transmission window (Ld) 300 mm Width of the transmission window (W) 120 mm Min. distance from ANT D5 to ANT D5 2m Transmission window /G 3ODQYLHZ 6DPLQ 6J 6DPD[ )RU6DPLQWKHWUDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZLVH[WHQGHG 6LGHYLHZ 7UDQVPLVVLRQZLQGRZ $17' 6D 6J PP 6SDFHUNLW 0HWDOSODWH Figure C-24 Transmission window for SLG D11S ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 337 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Metal-free area 0HWDO D D D D K PP QRQPHWDOVSDFHU D PP Figure C-25 Metal-free area for SLG D11S ANT D5 When installing in the vicinity of metal, observe the instructions in the Section Planning the MOBY D system. Definition of distance D ' ' 'LVWDQFH'P Figure C-26 338 Distance D: SLG D11S ANT D5 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Dimensions (in mm) 9LHZ$ 3RZHU6XSSO\ 9LQWHUIDFH $ $ PD[ PP [ )HUULWH &DEOHNLQNSURWHFWLRQ IOH[LEOHLQHYHU\GLUHFWLRQ 0LQLPXPEHQGLQJ UDGLXVPP &DEOHOHQJWKP Figure C-27 Dimension drawing for SLG D11S ANT D5 Note In order to guarantee optimum field data even in the vicinity of metal, ANT D5 is calibrated at the factory at a distance of 100 mm from metal. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 339 Previous versions C.2 Discontinued SLG with ANT D5 Spacer kit for MOBY D ANT D5 See Section SLG D10 basic unit, spacer kit for MOBY D ANT D5. 340 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 List of abbreviations D CE Communaute Europeenne: CE mark FCC Federal Communications Commission IC Industry Canada Lx Field length in X direction Ly Field length in Y direction MDS Mobile data storage units SLG Read/write device STG Service and test unit ASM Interface module IEC International Electrotechnical Commission MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 341 List of abbreviations VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker [Association of German Electrical Engineers] RFID Radio Frequency Identification Devices UL Underwriter Laboratories, USA CSA Canadian Standard Association EMC Electromagnetic compatibility FB Function block FC Function Sa Operating distance between MDS and SLG Sg Limit distance L Length of a transmission window CP Intersection of the axes of symmetry of the MDS UID Unique Identification. A serial number which identifies the transponder uniquely. 342 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Glossary Active field Area with minimum field strength containing the transmission window, as well as the areas in which the field strength is no longer sufficient for data exchange. Active surface See active field Automation system (AS) A programmable logical controller (PLC) of the SIMATIC S7 system, comprising a central controller, a CPU and various I/O modules. Byte A group of bits, normally eight CE Label Communaute Europeenne (product mark of the European Union) Communication modules Communication modules are used to integrate the MOBY identification systems in SIMATIC or SINUMERIK systems, or to connect them to PROFIBUS DP, PC or any other system. Once supplied with the corresponding parameters and data, they handle data communication. They then make the corresponding results and data available. Suitable software blocks (FB/FC for SIMATIC; C libraries for PCs with Windows Professional) ensure easy and fast integration in the application. Data transmission rate Unit of measurement for the volume of data transmitted within a unit of time, e.g. bytes/s Dwell time The dwell time is the time in which the transponder dwells within the transmission window of a write/read device. The write/read device can exchange data with the transponder during this time. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 343 Glossary Dynamic mode In dynamic mode, the data carrier moves past the write/read device at a traversing rate which depends on the configuration. Various checking mechanisms (CRC, etc.) ensure error-free data transfer even under extreme environmental conditions. A serial connection (up to 300 m) is used to connect the write/read device directly to an interface module, PC, or any other system. Electromagnetic compatibility Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of an electrical or electronic device to operate satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment without affecting or interfering with the environment over and above certain limits. EMC directive Guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility This guideline relates to any electrical or electronic equipment, plant or system containing electric or electronic components. Equipotential bonding Potential differences between different parts of a plant can arise due to the different design of the plant components and different voltage levels. It is necessary to compensate for these differences by equipotential bonding. this is done by combining the equipotential bonding conductors of power components and non-power components on a centralized equalizing conductor. ESD directive Directive for handling ESDs. Interface modules (ASM) See communication modules Limit distance The limit distance is the maximum clear distance between the upper surface of the write/read device and the transponder, at which the transmission can still function under normal conditions. Metal-free area Distance/area which must be maintained between the transponder and metal in order to prevent interference during data transfer between the transponder and write/read device. Mobile data storage units (MDS) See transponder 344 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Glossary Multi-tag capability Multi-tag capability means that a write/read device can communicate simultaneously with different data carriers. Programmable logic controller (PLC) The programmable logical controllers (PLC) of the SIMATIC S5 system consist of a central controller, one or more CPUs, and various other modules (e.g. I/O modules). Reader/writer See write/read device Readers Readers ensure fast, secure data transfer between mobile data storage units and higherlevel systems (PLCs, PCs, etc.). The data, energy included, are transmitted inductively across an electromagnetic alternating field or by radio. This principle enables contact-free data transmission, ensures high industrial compatibility and works reliably in the presence of contamination or through non-metallic materials. RFID systems SIMATIC RF identification systems control and optimize material flow and production sequences. They identify reliably, quickly and economically, use non-contact data communication technology, and store data directly on the product. They are also resistant to contamination. Secondary fields The strength of the secondary fields, which exist in addition to the transmission window, is usually lower than that of the transmission window and depends on the metallic environment. Secondary fields should not be used in configuring. Static mode In static mode the transponder is positioned at a fixed distance (maximum: limit distance) exactly above the write/read device. Transmission distance Distance between write/read device/antenna and transponder (mobile data storage unit) Transmission window Area in which reliable data exchange between transponder and write/read device is possible due to a particular minimum field strength. MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 345 Glossary Transponder An invented word from transmitter and responder. Transponders are used on the product, the product carrier, the object, or its transport or packaging unit, and contain production and manufacturing data, i.e. all application-specific data. They follow the product through assembly lines, transfer and production lines and are used to control material flow. Because of their wireless design, transponders can be used, if necessary, at individual work locations or manufacturing stations, where their data can be read and updated. Write/read devices (SLG) See readers Write/read distance See transmission distance 346 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Index A C ANT connecting cable Antenna connecting cable, 93 ANT D10 Definition of distance D, 214 Dimensions, 228 Technical data, 211 Transmission window, 225 ANT D5 Definition of distance D, 214 Technical data, 206, 211 ANT D6 Definition of distance D, 221 Technical data, 206, 211 Antenna duplexer, 277 Antenna extension cable, 93 Approvals, 295 ASM 452 Dimensions, 240 Operating mode, 233 Ordering data, 241 Pin assignments, 237 PROFIBUS DP address and terminating resistor, 234 PROFIBUS DP configuring, 233 Reader connection system, 235 Technical data, 239 ASM 473 Design and function, 243 Dimensions, 251 Hardware configuration, 246 Ordering data, 252 Pin assignments, 248 Reader connection system, 247 Technical data, 250 ASM 475 Assignment for connecting cable, 259 Configuration, 255 Design and function, 253 Indicator elements, 257 Ordering data, 262 Pin assignment, 259 Reader connection system, 258 Technical data, 261 wiring, 255 Cabinet configuration, 75 Cable Shielding, 81 Cable configuration, 85 Certificates, 295 Communication with the SLG, 30 Contact partner, 299 Coupling paths, 74 Courses, 300 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 E Electromagnetic compatibility Coupling paths, 74 Electromagnetic interference, 71 EMC Guidelines, 297 Avoiding interference, 78 Basic Rules, 70 Cabinet configuration, 75 Cable shielding, 81 Definition, 69 Equipotential bonding, 79 Overview, 68 Propagation of electromagnetic interference, 71 Equipotential bonding, 79 F Field data, 33 Fixing pocket for MDS D100, 101 I Interference sources Electromagnetic, 72 L LEDs For MOBY, 248 for PROFIBUS DP, 248 347 Index M MDS Memory division, 97 MDS D124 Dimensions, 304 Field data, 304 Metal-free area, 305 Ordering data, 302 Technical data, 303 MDS D139 Dimensions, 309 Field data, 308 Metal-free area, 310 Ordering data, 306 Technical data, 307 Metal-free area, 40 Flush-mounting, 41 Mounting on metal, 41 MOBY antenna distributor Design and function, 277 Ordering data, 277 Technical data, 278 O Ordering data SLG D11, 157 SLG D11 accessories, 157 P Pin assignment SLG D1x (RS 232), 86 SLG D1xS (RS 422), 88 SLG D10S ANT D5 Definition of distance D, 331 Dimensions, 332 Field data, 329 Metal-free area, 330 Ordering data, 326 Technical data, 327 Transmission window, 330 SLG D10S basic unit Dimensions, 178 Technical data, 176 SLG D11 ANT D5 Definition of distance D, 324 Dimensions, 325 Field data, 322 Metal-free area, 324 Ordering data, 319 Programming, 151 Technical data, 320 Transmission window, 323 SLG D11S ANT D5 Definition of distance D, 338 Dimensions, 339 Field data, 337 Metal-free area, 338 Ordering data, 334 Technical data, 335 Transmission window, 337 SLG D12 Definition of distance D, 168 Programming, 151 SLG D12S Definition of distance D, 192 Spacers, 102 T S Shield concept, 83 Shielding, 81 SLG D10 ANT D5 Definition of distance D, 316 Field data, 315 Metal-free area, 316 Ordering data, 312 Programming, 151 Technical data, 313 Transmission window, 315 SLG D10 basic unit Dimensions, 156 Technical data, 154 348 Technical documentation On the Internet, 300 Technical Support, 299 Tracking Tolerance, 27 Tracking tolerance, 27 Training, 300 Transmission window, 25 Impact of metal, 80 Reduction of interference due to metal, 51 Width, 27 Transponder Directions of motion, 29 MOBY D System Manual, 01/2010, J31069-D0147-A6-7618 Get more Information www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors SIEMENS AG Industry Sector Sensors and Communication Postfach 4848 90026 NURNBERG DEUTSCHLAND www.siemens.com/automation subject to change J31069-D0147-A6-7618 (c) Siemens AG 2010